Quarterlytics / Financial Services / Manx Financial Group

Manx Financial Group

mfx · LSE Financial Services
Claim this profile
Ticker mfx
Exchange LSE
Sector Financial Services
Industry
Employees 201-500
← All annual reports
FY2021 Annual Report · Manx Financial Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
_________________________________ 

ANNUAL REPORT 2021 

PLC 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Welcome to Manx Financial Group PLC 
Integrity through independence and service  

An independent banking group founded in 1935, domiciled in the 
Isle of Man 

Group 

Financial 

PLC 
Manx 
(“Company” or “MFG”) is an AIM-listed 
company  (LSE:  MFX.L)  which  has 
subsidiaries  (together  referred  to  as 
“Group”) engaged in a suite of financial 
services based in the Isle of Man and 
the  UK.  These  companies  offer 
financial  services  to  both  retail  and 
commercial 
MFG's 
strategy  is  to  grow  organically  and 
through strategic acquisition to further 
augment the range of services it offers.  

customers. 

Principal wholly owned subsidiaries:  
 Conister Bank Limited 
 Conister Finance & Leasing Ltd 
 Blue Star Business Solutions Limited 
 Edgewater Associates Limited 
 Manx FX Limited 

Blue  Star  Business  Solutions  Limited 
(“BBSL”) is a finance broker providing 
asset finance and commercial loans in 
the UK to the small and medium sized 
enterprises market. 

BBSL  was  acquired  as  part  of  the 
Group’s  strategy 
its 
distribution in the UK broker market. 

increase 

to 

Conister  Finance  &  Leasing  Ltd 
(“CFL”) is a subsidiary of the Bank. It 
is a credit broker providing brokerage 
of  hire  purchase  (“HP”)  and  leasing 
finance facilities in the UK.  

CFL is regulated by the FCA in the UK 
and 
registered  as  a  designated 
business by the FSA in the Isle of Man. 

Conister  Bank  Limited  (“Bank”)  is  a 
licensed  independent  bank,  regulated 
by  the  Isle  of  Man  Financial  Services 
Authority  (“FSA”),  the  UK’s  Financial 
Conduct Authority (“FCA”) and is a full 
member  of 
Isle  of  Man’s 
Association of Licensed Banks.  

the 

The  Bank  provides  a  variety  of 
financial  products  and  services, 
including  savings  accounts,  asset 
financing,  personal  loans,  loans  to 
small  and  medium  sized  enterprises, 
block discounting and other specialist 
secured  credit  facilities  to  the  Isle  of 
Man  and 
the  UK  consumer  and 
business sectors. 

Edgewater  Associates  Limited  (“EAL”) 
largest  firm  of  Independent 
is  the 
Financial Advisors (“IFA”) in the Isle of 
Man and is regulated by the FSA.  

EAL provides a bespoke and personal 
service to Isle of Man residents and to 
the  Group’s  business  and  personal 
customers  and  advises  on  assets  in 
excess  of  £368  million  (2020:  £361 
million).  

Manx  FX  Limited  (“MFX”)  provides 
foreign 
access 
exchange  and  international  payment 
processing facilities. 

competitive 

to 

target 

customers 

MFX’s 
are 
corporates  and  private  clients  who 
have  a 
foreign  exchange  and 
international  payment  requirement 
via 
foreign  exchange 
providers. 

their  UK 

 
 
 
 
 
   
   
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
Chairman’s Statement 

Business Model and Strategy 

Environmental, Social and Governance Report 

Risk Management 

Corporate Governance Report 

Directors, Officers and Advisers 

Audit, Risk and Compliance Committee 

Directors’ Remuneration Report 

Directors’ Report 

Annual Financial Statements’ Contents 

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities 

Independent Auditor’s Report 

Consolidated Statement of Profit or Loss and Other Comprehensive Income 

Company Statement of Profit or Loss and Other Comprehensive Income 

Consolidated Statement of Financial Position 

Company Statement of Financial Position 

Consolidated and Company Statements of Changes in Equity 

Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows 

Company Statement of Cash Flows 

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements 

4 

7 

9 

10 

15 

19 

22 

23 

27 

28 

29 

30 

36 

38 

39 

40 

41 

42 

43 

44 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT 

Dear Shareholders 

Introduction 

The current uncertainties  in global markets,  fuelled  firstly  by 
the  effects  of  the  COVID  pandemic,  and  now  the  Ukraine 
crisis,  look  to  dominate  the  economic  environment  for  the 
foreseeable future as our previous world order is challenged. 
It  seems  clear  that  inflationary  pressures  will  continue  for 
some considerable time. Interest rates will increase as central 
banks  attempt  to  address  these  issues  in  their  efforts  to 
stabilise money supply and maintain the availability of credit. 
The United Kingdom, however, is better placed than some as 
it does not suffer from certain of the structural weaknesses of 
its  competitors.  Notwithstanding,  there  is  no  doubt  that  the 
operating  expense  of  doing  business,  especially  wage 
inflation,  will  increase,  driven by  the  mounting  cost  of  living, 
coupled with a very tight labour market.  

With uncertainty comes opportunity and, whilst the pandemic 
has  undoubtedly  had  a  negative  impact  on  our  income 
statement, we have managed to strengthen our balance sheet 
during  the  last  two  years.  In  this  time,  our  lending  has 
increased by £50 million from £179 million to £229 million; our 
total assets by £56 million from £253 million to £309 million; 
and  funds  available  to  shareholders  by  £3  million  from  £22 
million to £25 million. All this positions us well for the future. 

Our enhanced balance sheet has allowed the Group to start 
paying  dividends  again  after  a  16-year  hiatus.  The  Board’s 
commitment is to return 10% of the Group’s profit available to 
shareholders  each  year  in  the  form  of  cash  or  shares.  This 
year, 
for  shareholder 
approval will be 0.2443 pence per share (2020: 0.1724 pence 
per share) - a 42% uplift, as we continue to reward our loyal 
shareholders 
the 
development of the Group.  

total  dividend  recommended 

in  a  manner 

that  will  not 

impede 

the 

Financial Performance 
The  year’s  financial  performance  is  pleasing  despite  two 
further lockdowns and continued economic uncertainty. Profit 
before  tax  payable  increased  by  £1.0  million  to  £3.0  million 
(2020:  £2.0  million),  a  growth  of  50%.  Of  particular  note  is 
Conister Bank’s record lending of £212.6 million (2020: £167.2 
million).  This,  along  with  our  strategy  of  reducing  onerous 
commission payments, has led to net trading income growing 
by  £3.6  million  to  £19.0  million  (2020:  £15.4  million)  and 
operating income by £3.6 million to £20.0 million (2020: £16.4 
million).  

Operating  expenses,  excluding  provisions  and  recovered 
VAT, increased by £1.2 million to £11.7 million (2020: £10.5 
million)  with  £0.3  million  of  this  relating  to  headcount  as  we 
bolster  our  UK  establishment,  both  organically  and  through 
our acquisitions. The balance, £0.8  million, relates to  higher 
IT, operational, and legal costs as we continued to improve our 
technology and grow our loan book. Total costs, excluding the 
one-off VAT credits, increased by £1.8 million to £17.1 million 
(2020: £15.3 million), with additional provisions of £0.4 million 
to £4.4 million (2020: £4.0 million), together with depreciation 
and  amortisation  of  intangibles  increasing  by  £0.2  million  to 
£1.1 million (2020: £0.9 million). Our operating income ratio, 
measured as operating income less impairment provisions on 
loans and advances to customers as a percentage of interest 
income, improved by 7.8% to 68.0% (2020: 60.2%), reflecting 
the development of a more efficient operating environment. 

Turning to the balance sheet, our total assets showed a £40.8 
million improvement to £308.8 million (2020: £268.0 million), 
driven  mainly  by  a  loan  book  increase  of  £36.1  million.  Our 
loyal  Isle  of  Man  depositor  base  continued  to  support  our 
growth  with  deposits  increasing  by  £35.2  million  to  £253.5 
million  (2020:  £218.3  million).  Over  the  year,  our  loan  to 
deposit ratio improved by 1.9% to 90.4% (2020: 88.5%) – a key 
measure of operational efficiency. Total liabilities increased by 
£38.5 million to £284.0 million (2020: £245.5 million), leading 
to  an  increase  in  total  equity  of  £2.6  million  to  £25.0  million 
(2020: £22.4 million). 

Key Objectives 
In  this  uncertain  economic  environment,  our  fundamental 
focus  continued  to  be  the  protection  of  shareholder  value. 
Thus,  our  strategic  concentration  remained  as  previously 
reported, namely to: 

  Provide the highest quality of service throughout our 
operations  to  all  customers,  ensuring  that  their 
treatment is both fair and appropriate; 

  Adopt a pro-active strategy to managing risk within a 

structured and compliant regime; 

  Concentrate  on  developing  our  core  business  by 
considered  acquisitions, 
increasing  prudential 
lending,  and  augmenting  the  range  of  financial 
services we offer; 

  Maintain  the  implementation  of  an  enhanced  and 
scalable  IT  infrastructure  to  better  service  the 
operational requirements of a growing Group without 
the  requirement  for  a  disproportionate  increase  in 
headcount and other associated operational costs; 

  Continue  to  develop  our  Treasury  management  to 
improve  the  return  on  the  liabilities  side  of  our 
balance sheet; and 

  Manage our balance sheet to exceed the regulatory 

requirements for capital adequacy. 

Environmental, Social and Corporate Governance 
We recognise the value and contribution that businesses such 
as  the  Group  can  make  to  society,  in  protecting  the 
environment,  being  responsible  and  ensuring  good  practice 
through  the  services  and  support  it  provides.  We  have 
witnessed  a  rapid  growth  in  the  international  focus  on 
sustainability,  tackling  dangerous  climate  change  and,  in 
particular,  the  part  that  the  finance  sector  is  being  asked  to 
play in meeting these challenges.  

We now integrate ESG across our business,  in our decision 
making  and  in  what  we  do.  Through  our  stewardship  and 
engagement  with  those  whom  we  work,  we  encourage  and 
finance  others  to  be  more  sustainable.  We  do  this  by 
understanding  and  responding  to  the  ESG  issues  that  are 
material  to  both  us  and  to  our  stakeholders.  We  have 
incorporated this philosophy in our strategy, risk management 
and  governance  as  described  in  greater  detail  later  in  this 
Report. 

Page | 4  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT 

Conister Bank Limited 
The  Bank  continued  to  progress  a  prudent  lending  strategy 
with the loan book increasing by £41.0 million to £234.4 million 
(2020:  £193.4  million).  We  recorded  growth  in  both  of  our 
markets, namely, our home market, the Isle of Man, and in the 
UK.  

The Isle of Man market demand for loan finance has virtually 
returned  to  its  pre-pandemic  levels  and  the  Bank  has 
improved its market share through flexible online offerings and 
being  accredited  to  the  Isle  of  Man  Government’s  Business 
Support  Schemes.  On  Island,  the  Bank  lent  a  record  £42.9 
million  (2020:  £34.9  million)  to  consumers  and  Small  and 
Medium  Sized  Enterprises  (“SMEs”)  with  over  60%  of  this 
originating from our online portal. 

through 

to  support  SMEs 

In the UK, the Bank lent £40.9 million in conjunction with the 
British  Business  Bank 
its 
accreditation  to  the  UK  Government  Loan  Schemes.  These 
schemes indemnified the Bank for between 80% to 100% of 
any loss. Since the year-end, the Bank has been accredited to 
provide  a  further  £20.0  million  of  liquidity  through  the  new 
Recovery Loan Scheme (“RLS”) which came into effect on 1 
January  2022.  With  the  tapering  of  Government  guarantee 
support, the RLS will provide the Bank with a guaranteed 70% 
of any loss incurred. These guarantee schemes are important 
to the Bank as the government support, whether from the Isle 
of  Man  or the  UK, provide  a considerable  level  of  insulation 
against loss. These are a safer form of lending during these 
difficult times and allow the Bank the opportunity to re-build its 
pipeline  as  businesses  adapt 
the  new  economic 
environment. 

to 

The Bank continues to seek acquisitions that provide access 
to niche lending markets in the UK. By owning the customer, 
the Bank continued its strategy to reduce its reliance on other 
introducers and their expensive commissions. In the last five 
years, I am pleased to say, commissions have decreased by 
58%,  or  £4.9  million,  from  £8.4  million  in  2017  to  a  more 
normalised  commission  level  of  £3.5  million  in  2021  (2020: 
£3.6 million). Over the same five-year period, interest income 
has  increased  by  £1.3  million  to  £22.0  million  (2020:  £20.7 
million).  

The Bank’s Isle of Man depositor base remains very loyal with 
a  retention  rate  in  excess  of  70%.  Whilst  we  continue  to 
consider new products for this market, it remains our intention 
to reduce our on-Island reliance. I expect to announce more 
on this topic in the coming months.  

During  the  year,  the  Bank  continued  to  attract  deposits  at 
historically  low  rates  to  fund  lending  with  cash  and  cash 
equivalents and debt securities totalling £58.5  million (2020: 
£57.4  million).  We  continued  to  apply  our  liquidity  in  our 
preferred  markets:  the  Isle  of  Man;  the  UK  Government 
backed schemes; the UK Structured Finance markets; and the 
UK  credit  broker  market.  We  have  been  building  our 
Structured  Finance  team  over  the  last  three  years,  and  this 
year the Bank lent £114.1 million (2020: £96.9 million) through 
this  distribution  channel.  Structured  Finance  is  an  area  we 
expect to grow our presence further in the coming years.  

Turning to the overheads, personnel expenses increased by 
£0.3 million reflecting the additional staff cost associated with 
our UK growth strategy with overheads overall increasing to 

£8.3  million  (2020:  £7.4  million).  We  continued  to  focus  on 
favourable customer outcomes and with the pandemic this has 
necessitated a level of forbearance which runs in tandem with 
lending  through  the  Government  support  schemes.  The 
Bank’s  forbearance  agreements  reduced  by  43%  during  the 
year.  This,  along  with  loan  book  growth  of  £41.0  million, 
allowed  our  provisioning  to  only  increase  by  £0.3  million  to 
£4.3  million  (2020:  £4.0  million),  reflecting  the  continued 
prudent  approach  we  have  taken  during  the  pandemic. 
Depreciation  and  amortisation  remained  constant  at  £0.6 
million. In total, the Bank’s cost base increased by £1.1 million 
to  £13.2  million  (2020:  £12.1  million)  but,  driven  by  the 
increase  in  turnover,  the  Bank’s  profit  before  tax  margin 
increased by 1.8% to 5.0% (2020: 3.2%). 

Total  assets  increased  by  £36.6  million  to  £296.8  million 
(2020:  £260.2  million),  a  growth  of  14%.  Shareholder  funds 
increased by £1.1 million to £31.2 million (2020: £30.1 million). 
The balance sheet has strengthened over the two years of the 
pandemic by 24% or £6.2 million, to £31.2 million from £25.0 
million in 2020.  

Edgewater Associates Limited 
We have re-focused and resourced this business to meet the 
demands  of  legislation  relating  to  the  provision  of  regulated 
financial  advice  on  the  Isle  of  Man.  In  addition,  through  a 
project to improve our technology, our customer segmentation 
will  allow  an  improved  customer  focused  journey  which  will 
also deliver operational efficiencies. Despite progressing the 
above projects and the negative impact of two extensive Isle 
of  Man  lockdowns  preventing  client  meetings,  the  business 
achieved  income  growth  of  9.5%  to  £2.3  million  (2020:  £2.1 
million),  with  recurring  income  increasing  by  9.1%  to  £1.2 
million  (2020:  £1.1  million).  Encouragingly,  with  the markets 
improving, the assets under advice grew by £7 million to £368 
million (2020: £361 million). Operations incurred one-off costs 
mainly  relating  to  the  above  projects  and  professional  fees, 
which after adjustment, generated an implied underlying profit 
of £0.2 million (2020 adjusted: nil). We expect, assuming no 
further Covid related lockdowns, a further improved financial 
performance in 2022. 

Manx FX Limited 
Our foreign exchange advisory continued to perform positively 
and recorded a record profit for the year of £1.2 million (2020: 
£1.1  million), with a marginal increase in the cost  to  income 
ratio to 19.0% (2020: 17.3%) as we build resilience. This is a 
highly cash generative business which contributed £1.0 million 
(2020: £0.6 million) to the Group’s treasury.  

We were successful in seeking ways to increase market share, 
and  showed  a  growth  of  26%  in  2021,  further  reducing  any 
reliance on certain market sectors. The expansion strategy will 
require the business to be re-branded as MFX Limited in the 
coming months. 

to 

Blue Star Business Solutions Limited 
With two UK lockdowns in the year, the business’s traditional 
markets  were  badly  impacted.  However,  through  the  Bank’s 
accreditation 
loan 
schemes, the business was able to grow its brokered lending 
to £14.3 million (2020: £7.5 million). Of the total advanced, the 
Bank wrote £8.8 million (2020: £3.7 million) with the balance 
being passed to other funders – providing the business with a 
second income stream. 

the  UK  Government  guaranteed 

Page | 5  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT 

The  business  was  profitable  in  its own  right  and contributed 
£0.5  million  (2020:  £0.4  million)  to  the  Group’s  income  this 
year. 

We acquired this business in April 2019 and we will incur our 
final contractual deferred consideration payment in April 2022. 
So far this has been a very successful acquisition.  

Ninkasi Rentals & Finance Limited  
The business changed its name from Beer Swaps Limited to 
Ninkasi Rentals & Finance Limited on 16 November 2021 to 
more accurately reflect its core business.  

The business continued to be the largest tank lessor in the UK 
brewing market with a fleet size 261 (2020: 185) providing 1.2 
million litres of brewing capacity (2020: 0.7 million litres). 

A key measure of performance is the deployment of its fleet 
which, despite the 41% increase in fleet size and the resulting 
72%  increase  in  brewing  capacity,  is  currently  89%  (2020: 
88%). The business, in addition to being profitable in its own 
right, generated £1.4 million (2020: £0.6 million) to the Group’s 
income this year. 

The Business Lending Exchange Limited 
On  11  October  2021,  we  announced  the  purchase  of  the 
remaining  shareholding  in  this  business  by  exercising  the 
option we negotiated in October 2016. The enterprise value of 
the business at acquisition was £2.2 million for which we paid 
£1.3 million including a significant deferred element.  

This  business  specialises  in  prudent  lending  through  their 
experienced  management  team  to  the  profitable  sub-prime 
SME  market,  a  sector  in  which  the  Bank  lacked  meaningful 
access.  In  addition  to  being  profitable  in  its  own  right,  the 
business  generated  £0.4  million  (2020:  £nil)  to  the  Group’s 
income. 

Outlook 
Against a backdrop of inflation, increasing interest rates and 
the tapering of government support schemes, 2022 will be a 
challenging year but it will also bring opportunity.  

On the Isle of Man, the lending market is buoyant and the Bank 
has  new  products  in  development  which  will  allow  it  to 
increase market share, particularly for those markets currently 
untapped.  

In  the  UK,  the  Bank  does  not  operate  in  the  mainstream 
clearing  bank markets  but  in niche,  resilient  sectors  and,  as 
such, we expect the competitive environment to remain similar 
to  this  year.  Further,  it  already  has  a  healthy  pipeline  for  its 
Structured  Finance  products  which,  along  with 
its 
accreditation  to  government  support  schemes,  will  form  the 
backbone to our loan book growth next year. 

Uncertainty, whilst historically challenging for our Isle of Man 
IFA  business,  should  not  impact  Edgewater  Associates 
Limited to the same extent as the constraints forced upon the 
operation during the pandemic. Conversely, our FX business 
has  thrived  on  currency  swings,  and  the  current  global 
concerns  should  allow 
its 
profitability. 

this  business 

to  maintain 

Our  existing  investments  in  Blue  Star  Business  Solutions 
Limited  (financing  technology);  Ninkasi  Leasing  &  Rental 
Limited  (leasing  fermentation  tanks)  and  The  Business 
Lending Exchange Limited (lending to  sub-prime SMEs) are 
all performing well and we seek to replicate this success with 
similar acquisitions. 

In summary, our diversity will continue to be a strength during 
this period of uncertainty.  

Board changes 
In November, I announced changes to the Board composition. 
Denham  Eke,  our  previous  CEO,  has  moved  to  the  newly 
created  position of  Executive Vice-Chairman.  I  would  like to 
put on record my thanks to Denham for his capable leadership 
during  his  tenure.  Douglas  Grant,  previously  our  CFO,  has 
accepted  the  position  of  CEO  in  Denham’s  stead.  James 
Smeed, previously our Group Financial Controller, has, in turn, 
accepted the position of  CFO and joined the Board together 
with Greg Jones as an Independent Non-Executive Director. 
Greg  also  joins  the  Board  of  the  Bank  as  a  Non-Executive 
Director and as a member of the Audit, Risk and Compliance 
Committee. Greg will be an invaluable addition to the Group, 
particularly in providing assistance in matters both legal and 
tax, and also by broadening the already significant skill range 
of our Independent Directors.  

I believe these appointments further strengthen our Board and 
I  look  forward  to  working  with  my  colleagues  to  meet  the 
challenges  and  opportunities  our  industry  will  provide  in  the 
coming years. 

Changes to our Memorandum and Articles of Association  
As we continue with our expansion, it has become apparent to 
the Board that we will have to modify our Memorandum and 
Articles of Association if we are to meet the regulatory licence 
application requirements for  additional jurisdictions. Thus, at 
the  forthcoming  General  Meeting,  shareholders  will  be 
presented  with  a  number  of  amendments  to  adopt.  Whilst 
initially  these  changes  may  appear  complex,  their  sole 
intention is to provide an enhanced layer of protection for our 
current  banking  licence  and  any  additional  licences  we  may 
seek to secure in the future. This requirement will be explained 
more thoroughly in a Circular which will accompany the Notice 
for the General Meeting. 

Thank you 
The  last  two  years  have  proved  difficult  for  our  staff,  both 
personally  and  professionally,  but  they  have  been  a  great 
credit to the Group. I would like to take this opportunity to thank 
them all for their dedication to both our customers and to our 
business during these difficult times. But it is not only our staff 
I  need  to  thank,  but  also  all  our  other  stakeholders  for  the 
support provided to the Group over the year. 

Jim Mellon 
Executive Chairman 
9 March 2022 

Page | 6  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

BUSINESS MODEL AND STRATEGY 

MFG has subsidiaries engaged in a suite of financial services 
based in the Isle of Man and the UK. These companies offer 
financial  services  to  both  retail  and  commercial  customers. 
MFG's  strategy  is  to  grow  organically  and  through  strategic 
acquisition to further augment the range of services it offers. A 
summary  of  the  strategic  objectives  for  each  principal 
subsidiary is set out below. 

alternatives  to  be  confident  that  it  can  raise  the  necessary 
deposits when required.  

The  Bank’s  acquisition  strategy  is  to  gain  market  share  in 
markets  it  already  operates  within  or  to  gain  access  to  a 
desirable  market  through  an  existing  reputable,  profitable 
operator.  

Conister Bank Limited (“Bank”) 
The  Bank’s  Board  of  Directors  (“Bank’s  Board”)  has  set 
strategic  objectives,  aligned  to  its  strategic  plan.  These 
objectives  provide  the  framework  for  setting  risk  appetite 
statements and tolerances for all material risks. The strategic 
objectives set are: 

  Maintain capital adequacy; 
  Deliver stable earnings growth; 
  Secure  stable  and  efficient  access  to  funding  and 

liquidity; 

  Maintain stakeholder confidence; and 
  Progress  its  Environmental  Social and  Governance 

(“ESG”) strategy. 

These strategic objectives provide the link between the Bank’s 
strategic planning and its risk management framework, using 
risk appetite statements, measures and tolerances to manage 
risk  on  a  day-to-day  basis  and  are  reviewed  annually  and 
approved by the Bank’s Board. Key in considering the Bank’s 
judgement  of  appetites  is  its  assessment  of  its  regulatory 
environment  (both in the Isle of  Man (“IOM”) and the United 
Kingdom (“UK”); the IOM deposit market; access to regulatory 
capital;  the  IOM  and  UK  credit  markets;  the  suitability  of  its 
product  range;  concentrations  of  advances  and  historic 
arrears. The aim is to deliver controlled growth, by providing 
adequate returns with strong credit profiles.  

Having  considered  the  above  in  light  of  the  COVID-19 
pandemic  and  Brexit,  drawing  on  both  internal  and  external 
resources, the Bank continues to believe the credit markets in 
which it operates will deliver growth with liquidity sourced from 
both  its  Balance  Sheet  and  the  IOM’s  substantial  deposit 
base. This growth will be achieved through the expansion of 
existing  products  organically,  including  participating  in  IOM 
and UK government business support schemes and through 
acquisition.  This  strategy  can  be  analysed  by  the  two 
geographical areas the Bank operates within, namely the IOM 
and the UK. 

The Bank is proud of its heritage and remains heavily centric 
in  the  IOM  but  recognised that  as  its  UK  loan  book  grows  it 
would need to create a UK presence to manage and grow this 
aspect of its business. 

Sourcing  reliable  funding  underpins  the  Bank’s  growth 
objectives.  The  Bank’s  strategy  in  this  area  is  to  secure  a 
diversified, low cost suite of liquidity alternatives to draw upon 
in  order  to  support  its  lending  strategy.  The  IOM  deposit 
market  remains  a  key  source  of  liquidity  which  the  Bank 
accesses  through  its  fixed-term  deposit  and  notice  account 
products.  

The Bank recognises that it has an opportunity to increase its 
market  share  as  a  result  of  the  reduction  in  competition 
experienced in this market and/or by increasing interest rates. 
As  such,  the  Bank  believes  that  it  has  sufficient  reliable 

Regarding the former, the Bank continues to enjoy a positive 
lending  experience  within  the  Structured  Finance  and  UK 
credit broker market and currently has circa £172 million of net 
loans outstanding.  

The  Bank’s  decision  to  incorporate  ESG  response  within  its 
strategic objectives for 2021 has seen great progress made in 
the  year.  In  the  next  12  months  the  Bank  will  publish  a 
summary  of  its  first  Sustainability  Report  setting  out  its 
material  ESG  issues  and  objectives,  work  done  and  ESG 
performance.  

The  Bank’s  programme  of  ESG  integration  and  its  ESG 
stewardship in its external relationships has seen the Bank:  

  Adopt and champion five United Nations Sustainable 

Development Goals: 

o  Good Health & Well Being;  
o  Affordable & Clean Energy;  
o  Decent Work and Economic Growth;  
o  Sustainable Cities & Communities; and  
o  Climate Action.  

  Adopt a green finance strategy in the provision of its 

services; 

  Recognise 

the  UN  principles 

for  Responsible 

Banking; 

  Become  a  supporter  of  the  Task  Force  on  Climate 

Related Financial Disclosures; 

  Undertake and continue with annual carbon footprint 

 

and greenhouse gas emissions assessments; and 
Implement an ESG integration plan and programme 
of  work  across 
regular 
the  Bank 
engagement  with  staff,  customers  and  other 
stakeholders on ESG. 

including 

Edgewater Associates Limited (“EAL”) 
EAL is the largest IFA firm in the IOM and is regulated by the 
Isle of Man Financial Services Authority (“FSA”). Its strategic 
objectives are to: 

  Grow and service its client base; 
 
Increase assets under advice; and 
  Grow and develop its staff complement. 

EAL is a generalist IFA practice with a diverse mix of clients 
requiring a broad range of products and services covering: 

First time buyers - mortgages; 

 
  Newly  qualified  professionals  -  protection,  savings, 

school fees; 

  Established clients - wealth management, retirement 

planning; and 

  General insurance clients - home, travel, commercial 

and specialist. 

Page | 7  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

BUSINESS MODEL AND STRATEGY 

After  four  acquisitions  and  an  active  data  cleansing  review, 
EAL now has an active client base of approximately 7,000 with 
associated  assets  under  advice  of  £368 million  (2020:  £361 
million). 

Whilst  EAL  will  continue  to  grow  and  develop  its  standard 
business model, it will always be open to new opportunities. It 
remains  nimble  and  ready  to  move  with  economic  and 
regulatory changes as they arise; its team remains up-to-date 
against  industry standards  and  trends.  It  retains  an  appetite 
for  growth  either  through  additional  acquisition  opportunities 
that may arise, or via organic growth from its existing clients 
and  business  partners  with  whom 
it  has  built  strong 
relationships. 

Diversification  opportunities  are  also  encouraged  and 
pursued,  as  per  its  successful  programme  to  grow  or  build 
Employee  Benefit  Group  Schemes.  This  incorporates  staff 
pensions  (including  pension  freedom),  protection,  private 
medical cover, and death in service. 

To  keep  pace  with  its  development  it  will  continue  to  train 
talented people to progress to rounded, professional advisers 
who  are  able  to  fit  into  succession  planning.  To  supplement 
this, it also takes the opportunity to recruit quality experienced 
advisers and para-planners who can further enhance its team. 

Manx FX Limited (“MFX”) 
The strategic objectives of MFX are: 

 

 

 

To be the first choice for international payments and 
foreign exchange of corporations in the IOM; 
To  maintain,  develop  and  strengthen  existing 
relationships;  
To  increase  the  number  of  referrals  to  their  foreign 
exchange  business  partners  with  a  view  of 
onboarding new accounts. 

MFX target customers are corporates and private clients who 
have  a 
international  payment 
requirement via its UK foreign exchange providers. 

foreign  exchange  and 

The IOM offers a diversified range of industries and sectors. 
For  the  next  12  months  MFX  will  concentrate  its  efforts  in 

developing  new  business  opportunities  both  on  IOM  and  in 
other jurisdictions.  

MFX  has  the  ability  to  negotiate  upfront  agreed  foreign 
exchange  margins  and  applies  price  transparency  which 
underpins  the  professional  relationship  it  provides.  The 
international payment fees offer competitive value, at reduced 
rates compared with local high street banks. 

Blue Star Business Solutions Limited (“BBSL”) 
The strategic  objectives  of  BBSL  are  to  continue  to  grow  its 
direct  model  to  niche  suppliers  through  the  distribution  of 
government guaranteed schemes whilst growing its traditional 
pipeline to allow it to migrate to its ordinary course of business 
when these schemes conclude.   

Further,  BBSL  will  continue  to  expand  its  panel  of  funders 
apart from the Bank with whom to place loans to maximise its 
sources of revenue.  

Finally, BBSL will continue to develop its sales force to allow 
greater market penetration.  

Ninkasi Rentals & Finance Limited (“Ninkasi”) 
This  business  remains  well  positioned  to  gain  more  market 
share through its unique leasing options and that will remain 
its core objective for the next 12 months.   

In  addition,  Ninkasi  will  consider  expanding  its  market  to 
Europe by either a direct distribution strategy or in partnership 
with a complementary business.  If progressed, this expansion 
will  be  in  a  limited  and  controlled  manner  utilising  existing 
assets and finance products to minimise downside risk. 

Further,  Ninkasi  will  manage  its  utilisation  rate  to  a  more 
normal level through the acquisition of additional fermentation 
tanks. 

The Business Lending Exchange Limited (“BLX”) 
BLX will continue to grow the loan book prudently in existing 
markets through the UK credit broker network and use existing 
market  attractive  products  in  a  customer  focused  way  to 
ensure the best possible customer outcome. 

Page | 8  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE (“ESG”) 

The Group’s Material ESG Issues 
The Group and its subsidiaries have a long history of supporting the people and businesses in the communities it serves. With a wide 
range of ESG issues in the spotlight we identify those that are the most material and make the largest impact on the Group and those 
that are most important to our stakeholders and where we can make the greatest contribution in what we do.  

In 2021 the Group undertook its first ESG materiality assessment through a process of workshops and interviews. 

Community Investment –  

Continue to invest and support the people and businesses in the communities it serves.  

Conduct & Compliance –  

Exemplar of good business conduct and compliance. 

Equality, Diversity & Inclusion –  

Providing equal opportunity to its diverse group of employees who feel valued and safe 
in being able to contribute to the business. 

Access to Finance & Financial Services –  

Providing  access  to  finance  and  services  to  those  who  may  be  disadvantaged  or 
excluded from other sources of finance. 

Talent Attraction & Retention -  

The Group is seen as a place where people would like to work. It remains able to attract 
and retain the best talent for its business. 

Training & Education –  

Ensuring the Group’s employees have access to continuous and focused training and 
education. Continuing to share its knowledge with its stakeholders. 

Data Privacy and Security -  

Protect  and  manage  responsibly  the  data  of  those  the  Group  engages  with  in 
accordance with its regulatory obligations, consents and notices. 

Financial Resilience & Performance –  

In the Group’s strategies, risk management and governance, continue to provide strong 
financial resilience and outstanding performance across its businesses. 

Systemic Risk Management - 

Through  the  Group’s  governance  and  control  mechanisms  continue  to  provide  and 
mitigate against systemic risks across the business. 

Customer and Client Experience –  

Continuously improving its customer & client experience in the provision of its services. 

Regulatory Change –  

Keeping pace or ahead of and responding purposefully to regulatory change. 

Digital Access -  

Providing  leading  digital  access  to  its  services  and  information  for  its customers  and 
stakeholders. 

ESG Integration into Financial Analysis –  

Incorporating  ESG  in  the  Group’s  assessments,  decision  making  and  the  choices  it 
makes. 

Financing the Transition -  

To finance the transition to a more sustainable world including tackling climate change, 
resource depletion and biodiversity loss. 

Page | 9  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

RISK MANAGEMENT 

Risk management overview 
Effective risk management is crucial to MFG’s sustainability. 
The  MFG’s  Board  of  Directors  (“Board”) 
is  ultimately 
accountable for the effective governance of risk management. 
The Board maintains its oversight and responsibilities in terms 
of  the  three  lines  of  defence  risk  governance  model  set  out 
below.  

Determining the Group’s risk tolerance and appetite through 
enterprise  risk  management  is  a  key  element  of  MFG’s 
corporate governance framework.  It is primarily designed to 
assist  the  Group  in  enhancing  its  corporate  governance 
framework  and  intended  to  reinforce  the  key  elements  of 
widely  accepted  and  long-established  Quoted  Companies 
Alliance (“QCA”) corporate governance principles.   

A fundamental principle contained in the code, is for effective 
risk  management:  MFG  has  in  place  a  Risk  Management 
Framework (“RMF”) to support the implementation of some of 
the  principles  of 
the  MFG  Governance  Framework  at 
subsidiary  level.  The  RMF  supports  the  Board  and  senior 
management  in  fulfilling  their  respective  duties  in  relation  to 
the  sustainable  operation  of  the  business.  This  includes  the 
integration  of  ESG 
its 
stewardship.  The  risk  management  system  is  supported  by 
policies,  processes  and  activities  relating  to  the  taking, 
management and reporting of risk. 

the  business  and 

through 

in 

Management and accountability 
The  Audit,  Risk  and  Compliance  Committee  (“ARCC”)  is 
operated  at  a  Group  level  and  currently  comprises  of  three 
experienced  Non-executive  Directors  who  are  qualified 
accountants.  Only  members  of  the  ARCC  have  the  right  to 
attend ARCC meetings to allow for independence. However, 
other  individuals  representing  Executive  Management,  Risk, 
Compliance and Internal and External Audit are invited by the 
Chairman of the ARCC to attend all or part of any meeting as 
and when appropriate. 

The main objectives of the ARCC are to review operations and 
ensure  that  they  are  conducted  to  the  highest  possible 
standards. This is accomplished by providing an independent 
objective assurance function specifically for, but not limited to: 
Internal  Controls  and  Risk  Management  Systems; 
Whistleblowing  and  Fraud;  Risk  and  Compliance;  Internal 
Audit and External Audit. 

It  provides  oversight  of  compliance  with  all  legislation, 
regulation and applicable codes of practice in the jurisdictions 
that  MFG  conducts  business;  and 
reviews  policies, 
procedures and processes to effectively identify, quantify and 
manage all material risks and to advise on best practice. 

RMF 
The  following  overview  of  the  key  governance  components 
that  make  up  the  MFG  system  of  governance  illustrates  the 
crucial role of the RMF:  

RMF - Culture 
The  risk  culture,  which  forms  part  of  MFG’s  overall  culture, 
encompasses the tone at the top of the organisation and a set 
of  shared  attitudes,  values,  behaviours  and  practices  that 
characterise how individuals at MFG consider risk in their day-
to-day business activities. Learnings are taken from previous 

incidents  and  ongoing  assessment  to  ensure  continuous 
improvement in the management of risk.  

All  individuals  are  trained  to  understand  the  importance  of 
effective  risk  management  and  ensure  that  risks  associated 
with  their  role  are  appropriately  understood,  managed  and 
reported.  Individuals  at  all  levels  communicate  risk  related 
insights in a timely, transparent and honest manner. 

This culture is driven from the top by the Board and Executive 
Management through how they communicate, make decisions 
and motivate the business. Managers and leaders ensure that 
in  all  their  actions  and  behaviours  they  continually  reinforce 
the culture that the effective management of risk is critical to 
MFG’s  success  and  that  every  individual  plays  a  role  in  the 
management of risk. 

RMF - Appetite 
Risk appetites are currently only set at subsidiary level and set 
out the maximum amount of risk that it is prepared to accept 
in  the  pursuit  of  delivering  on  business  objectives.  The  risk 
appetite considers all the risks detailed under “Principal risks”  
on  page  12  and  is  reviewed  annually,  and  as  the  operating 
environment changes, it is constantly measured against stated 
appetite to take appropriate action.   

RMF - Risk identification, measurement and control 
Having  a  robust  understanding  of  the  risks  to  which  the 
business is exposed is crucial to ensure that all material risks 
are appropriately monitored, managed and reported on. Each 
individual within the Group in conjunction with their manager 
is responsible for understanding the risks associated with their 
role.  An  understanding  of  risk  is  developed  through  the 
identification, 
appropriate, 
measurement of risks to which the business is exposed.  

and,  where 

assessment 

These  processes  are  performed  as  part  of  strategy  setting, 
strategy execution and day-to-day operations and are referred 
to  as risk and control assessments. The Risk team provides 
tools  to  aid  managers  and  individuals  in  developing  an 
understanding  of  risk  within 
their  respective  business 
responsibilities. 

The  risk  and  control  assessment  process  of  understanding 
risk and reviewing the adequacy and effectiveness of related 
controls and risk mitigation approaches is generally performed 
on  a  regular  basis, at  least  annually,  and  is  reported to  and 
governed by: 

  A high level risk assessment to identify the top risks 
enabling work to progress in a risk focused manner 
on completing risk and control assessments, in order 
to build a key controls monitoring programme; 

  Management Committees, including a review of roles 
and  responsibilities  to  ensure  that  all  material  risks 
are  captured  and  formally  considered  prior  to 
presentation to the ARCC and the Board; 

  Policies  within  the  policy  framework  to  ensure  that 
the relevant Management Committee is accountable 
for the policies that support their risk, and to reduce 
the workload for the ARCC and the Board, enabling 
them  to  focus  on  overseeing  and  challenging  the 
RMF; and 

Page | 10  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

RISK MANAGEMENT 

  Board  approved  risk  appetite  statements,  and  the 
design  of  an  underlying  risk  appetite  measures 
framework,  to  be  owned  and  monitored  by  the 
relevant Management Committee. 

RMF - Three lines of defence and key assurance functions  
As  part  of  its  overall  RMF,  MFG  has  adopted  best  practice 
monitoring and control mechanisms by implementing the three 
lines of defence governance and combined assurance model. 
This means that responsibility for governance and oversight is 
allocated  throughout  the  organisation  according  to  the  three 
lines of defence principles.   

The three lines of defence governance model is regarded as 
international  best  practice  for  ensuring  good  governance 
(including  governance  within  risk  and  capital  management) 
across an organisation. The emphasis is placed on ownership, 
responsibility, 
independence,  assurance,  communication, 
oversight and transparency across MFG’s governance.  

The  term  ‘key  assurance  function’  refers  to  a  properly 
authorised  function,  whether  in  the  form of  a  person,  unit  or 
department,  serving  as  a  control  or  ‘checks  and  balances’ 
function from a governance perspective, and which carries out 
such activities.  These functions typically are second and third 
line of defence functions.  

First line of defence  
The first line of defence e.g. business management is primarily 
accountable 
risk  origination  and 
management in accordance with risk policy and strategy. This 
includes 
implementing 
responses.    

identifying,  assessing  risks  and 

the  day-to-day 

for 

Second line of defence  
The second line of defence is responsible for the development 
and maintenance of the frameworks and policies. The second 
line  provides  oversight  of,  and  challenge  to,  the  first  line  of 
defence and drives the implementation of the frameworks and 
policies. 

Third line of defence  
The  third  line  of  defence  is  the  independent  assurance 
function  providing  overall  assurance 
the  Board  on 
governance, risk management, and internal controls. The third 
line of defence comprises of internal audit, external audit and 
other  independent  assurance  providers.    The  third  line  of 
defence is completely independent from the management of 
the day-to-day business activities. 

to 

RMF - MFG assurance functions  
MFG has effective systems of risk management and internal 
control.  The  tasks,  processes  and  obligations  of  the  key 
assurance functions are transparent and clearly defined, with 
regular exchange of information between the functions. Each 
of  the functions is structured to ensure that the function has 
the necessary authority, independence, resources, expertise 
and  access  to  the  Board  and  all  relevant  employees  and 
information to exercise its authority.  The minimum assurance 
functions within MFG include:  

  Risk management function;   
  Compliance function; and 
 
Internal Audit function.  

The  departmental  head  of  each  of  these  key  functions 
possesses  the  necessary  skills,  experience  and  knowledge 
required for the specific positions they exercise, and meet all 
suitability and ‘fit and proper’ requirements. Written guidelines 
for these functions are in place, and compliance with them is 
assured on a regular basis.  All of the key functions within MFG 
have a direct reporting line to the ARCC and the Board.  

MFG  has  developed  a  combined  assurance  model  to 
effectively  manage  the  organisation’s  significant  risks  and 
material  matters  through  a  combination  of  the  assurance 
service providers and functions described above. 

RMF  -  Internal  Capital  Adequacy  Assessment  Process 
(“ICAAP”) 
Overview 
ICAAP  is  a  key  strategic  and  risk  management  tool  for  the 
Bank.  It  is  a  key component of  the  Bank’s  planning  process 
during the short and medium-term. The Bank’s lead regulator, 
the  FSA,  requires  the  Bank  to  establish  and  maintain  an 
ongoing  internal  adequacy  assessment  process  which  is 
appropriate to the nature and scale of its business and review 
that process annually and evidence that review. 

Methodology 
The Bank’s ICAAP process is as follows: 

Formulation of the Bank’s strategy and budget  
Strategic  plans  are  prepared  annually  for  the  forthcoming 
year, which will consider the Bank’s risk appetite, key market 
sectors to target, products to leverage/introduce, headcount, 
operational and capital investment required. 

Risk assessment 
The Executive Team will liaise with the Risk and Compliance 
department to determine the material risks in the Bank based 
on  incidents  and  breaches,  Internal  Audit  reports,  Risk  and 
Compliance report findings and issues raised at the Board and 
Committee meetings. 

Stress testing and reverse stress testing 
The  Finance  department  uses  Bank  of  England  market 
assumptions  for  stress  testing  and  stress  the  five-year 
forecasts  to  identify  any  capital  deficiencies.  Reverse  stress 
testing  is  also  used based  on  the  assumption  that  the  Bank 
ceases to trade, coupled with a run-off scenario to determine 
the capital distribution.  

Reverse stress testing is used to explore the vulnerabilities of 
the Bank’s strategy and plans to extreme adverse events that 
would  cause  the  business  to  fail  in  order  to  facilitate 
contingency planning. 

Calculation of capital requirement and buffers 
Following the setting of strategy, risk assessment and stress 
tests, the Bank will then calculate its capital requirements by 
considering the following areas: 

  Pillar  I  –  The  calculation  is  based  on  the  minimum 
regulatory requirement under Pillar I of 10.0% of risk 
weighted assets for material risks; 

  Pillar II – Assessment of any additional business risks 
not covered by the minimum Pillar I requirement, plus 

Page | 11  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

RISK MANAGEMENT 

an  assessment  of  Pillar  II  risks  based  upon  the 
current material risk assessment and stress tests, to 
determine whether any additional capital buffers are 
deemed appropriate; 

  Pillar  III  –  Pillar  III  establishes  measures  to  make 
better use of market discipline. Pillar III applies only 
at the top consolidated level of a banking group and 
is therefore generally not considered to be applicable 
to  IOM  incorporated  banks  as  per  FSA  ICAAP 
guidance; and  

  Buffers – The Bank assesses its position to industry 
standard  for  regulatory  buffers  and  calculates  its 
position  based  on  its  overall  exposures  to  different 
jurisdictions. 

Review, challenge and adoption of the ICAAP 
The  ICAAP  is  prepared  by  the  Finance  department  in 
conjunction  with  the  Risk  and  Compliance  department,  and 
reviewed  by  the  Bank’s  Executive  Team,  Risk  Management 
Committee, the ARCC, Internal Audit and the External Auditor 
prior to approval by the Bank’s Board. It is used to measure 
and benchmark the Bank’s risk appetite and to forecast capital 
usage under both stressed and normal conditions. The ICAAP 
is challenged at all stages of the review process and presented 
to the Bank’s Board by the ARCC for approval prior to being 
submitted  to  the  FSA. The  ICAAP  is  regularly  reviewed  and 
updated throughout the year by management and referred to 
the ARCC and the Bank’s Board. 

ICAAP Results 
The  Bank  has  completed  its  ICAAP  testing  for  2021  in 
compliance with regulatory requirements. Despite the severity 
of the risk scenarios modelled, the Bank satisfied the capital 
and leverage requirements for the purpose of the stress test.  

Principal risks 
As a result of the RMF, identified on pages 11 to 12, the Group 
has exposure to the following key risks: 

  Strategic; 
  Credit risk including counterparty credit;  
  Operational risk including regulatory; 
  Conduct; 
 
Liquidity; 
 
Interest rate; 
  Regulatory; and 
  Reputation. 

The  Group  has  considered  the  above  key  risks  that  it  faces 
and the mitigating controls against those risks: 

Strategic risk 
Strategic risk is the risk to the Group’s revenue as set within 
the  budget  and  the  medium-term  plans  arising  through  sub-
optimal  implementation  of  the  strategic  plan  due  to  either 
internal or external factors faced by its subsidiaries. 

Controls and mitigation 
The  Group  controls  and  mitigates  this  risk  via  a  number  of 
measures: 

  Subsidiaries  generally  commence 

formal 
planning  process  in  September  for  the  forthcoming 
year,  to  inform  the  budget  submitted  to  the  boards 

their 

throughout  the  Group  for  approval.  In  reality,  the 
planning  process  is  continuous  and  responsive  to 
change in the internal and external environment; 

  Barriers to delivering the strategic plan, and changes 
to  planned  activity  are  captured  in  the  various 
subsidiary  ‘Managing  Directors’  Reports’  which  are 
submitted  to  their  respective  boards  and  then 
ultimately reported to the Group Board at each Board 
meeting. The reports will take account of input from 
the Group Executive Directors and current financial 
performance  versus  budget  and  seek  to  highlight 
strategic responses for the related subsidiary; 

  Key  strategic  projects  are  managed  under  formal 
project  governance  with  progress  of  key  projects 
tracked, and communicated and discussed at regular 
project meetings; and 

 

The  impact  of  limited  capital,  liquidity,  operational 
capacity and regulator restriction on the achievement 
of strategy is captured by the planning process, with 
exceptional  items  dealt  with under  the  relevant  risk 
category,  where  the  impact  on  risk  appetite  and 
mitigating actions will be formally recorded.  

Credit risk including counterparty credit risk 
Credit risk is defined as the risk that counterparties fail to fulfil 
their  contractual  obligations.  A  material  decline  in  credit 
quality, or the failure of a counterparty could result in higher 
levels  of  arrears  and  ultimately  in  increased  provisions  and 
write-offs, which impacts upon profitability, potentially eroding 
the capital position for the Group’s subsidiaries.  

Controls and mitigation 

individual 

  Delegated  authorities:  The  Group  operates  to  a 
schedule  of  delegated  authorisation  limits  linked  to 
an 
and 
experience.  This  is  bolstered  by  validations  of  all 
significant  credit  exposures  over  set  limits  and 
ongoing  monitoring  of  credit  positions  of  key 
suppliers and intermediary networks; 

underwriter’s 

knowledge 

  Distribution  strategy:  The  Group  actively  monitors 
and controls the credit risk of all business written to 
ensure  that  it  is  treating  customers  fairly  and  as  a 
safeguard  against  the  failure  of  any  business 
relationship.  Mitigation  of  counterparty  credit  risk  is 
undertaken 
the  maintenance,  where 
appropriate, of cash reserves and loss pools to fund 
indemnity.  Comprehensive  due 
any  buy-back 
diligence processes are also undertaken;  

through 

  Monitoring  of  credit  quality  exposure:  The  Group 
monitors  its  credit  risk  exposures  via  an  internal 
credit  risk  grading  methodology  that  assigns  each 
individual  exposure  with  one  of  three  credit  grades 
based upon the probability of default at product and 
distribution  channel  level.  This  allows  for  better 
monitoring  of  credit  quality  and  impairment  of  its 
current book as well as forecast and stress testing on 
a more accurate basis;  

  Concentration 

unintentional 

risk:  To  protect  against 
build-up 

the 
exposures  where 

of 

Page | 12  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

RISK MANAGEMENT 

impact 

deterioration 
the 
could  materially 
sustainability  and  profitability,  the  Group  seeks  to 
maintain  a  diverse  portfolio  of  products  across  a 
variety  of  geographical  regions,  customers,  sectors 
and asset classes. This diversity protects the Group 
against any deterioration in a particular geographical 
the  economic  environment,  commercial 
region, 
sector etc; and  

  Accounting  standards:  Finally,  the  introduction  of 
Instruments,  provides  an 

–  Financial 

IFRS  9 
additional credit risk buffer.  

Operational risk including regulatory risks 
Operational risk is the risk of loss resulting from human error, 
inadequate  or  failed  internal  processes  or  controls,  system 
failure, improper conduct, fraud or external events. 

The  principal  operational  risks  for  the  Group  arise  from  the 
following areas: 

  Resilience of the IT environment: The IT environment 
is  under  constant  review  to  identify  and  implement 
efficiencies  to  enable  increased  customer  service 
through  the  provision  of  additional  services  and 
products  and  to  automate  manual  tasks  wherever 
possible  to  minimise  the  potential  for  human  error. 
The  Group’s  IT  Steering  Committee  reviews  and 
monitors  current  service  standards,  highlights  any 
deficiencies  and mitigates accordingly.  There  are  a 
number of exception reports and scheduled tasks on 
a  daily  basis  to  ensure  that  any  controls  within 
systems are being reported on adequately; and 

 

Third  Party  administration  services:  The  key 
operational controls ensure that partners are fulfilling 
their legal and regulatory obligations in accordance 
with  their  service-level  agreement  with  the  Group.  
The  Group  has  an  outsourcing  policy  to  ensure 
obligations are monitored and met. Internal reviews 
and  audits  are  conducted  on  counterparties  to 
ensure terms agreed are being adhered to. 

Controls and mitigation 

  Adherence to internal limits and approval processes 

through:  

o  Delegated authorities: The Group operates 
to  a  schedule  of  delegated  credit 
authorisation  limits  and  payment  approval 
limits,  linked  to  an  individual’s  knowledge 
and experience; 

o  Segregation of duties: There is appropriate 
segregation  between 
those  authorising 
transactions and those executing them, with 
four  eyes  principles 
in  place  where 
required; 
o  Exception 

reporting 
reporting:  Daily 
ensures  that  any  regulatory  and  internal 
limits  are 
the 
reviewed 
appropriate Management team; and 

regularly  by 

o  New Business approval policy: All material 
new  business  is  approved  in  line  with  a 
formally  approved  policy,  with  ultimate 
decision making resting with the applicable 
Executive Committee. 

  Change  control:  The  Group  ensures  that  both, 
changes to existing products and services and new 
products and services, are delivered in a controlled 
manner with the appropriate checks and controls in 
place; 

  Onboarding: A comprehensive on-boarding process 
in place for new outsourced partners in the UK; 

  Due diligence checks: The operational risk from the 
Group’s  third  party  administrators  is  mitigated  by  a 
comprehensive  due  diligence  process  which 
includes a take-on due diligence and a full review of 
the  partner’s  policies,  procedures  and  financial 
stability; 

  Key  Operational  Controls:  Key  controls  are 
monitored  through  a  combination  of  management 
oversight,  Risk  and  Compliance  monitoring  and 
Internal Audit reviews; 

  New  Business  Policy  and  Process:  New  business 
and material business change is outlined in a formal 
policy,  which 
that  a  sequence  of 
assessment  and  approval  is  followed.  This  will 
ensure that all relevant input is included and material 
risks considered; and 

requires 

  Exception  reports:  Exception  reporting  allows  the 
Group  to  identify  weaknesses  in  processes  and 
controls  which  in  turn  allows  for  adequate  training 
and the bolstering of systems and processes. 

Conduct risk 
The Group is exposed to conduct risk through its operations 
and  interactions  with  consumers,  either  directly  or  through 
third parties (brokers, or counter-parties).   The risk exposure 
is  regulatory  in  nature  for  the  Group’s  UK  based  operations 
and consideration of any local jurisdiction guidance on good 
practice. 

Controls and mitigation 
The Group has an outsourcing policy to ensure that adherence 
to  conduct  and  regulatory  standards  is  contracted,  and 
compliance with standards is appropriately monitored through 
the  collection  and  assessment  of  relevant  data,  partner 
attestation, and onsite audits where appropriate.  

General  conduct  and  particularly  Treating  Customers  Fairly 
(“TCF”) principles are applied across the Group’s activities.  

Liquidity risk 
Financial institutions are subject to liquidity risk as an inherent 
part of their business. Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group 
may not hold sufficient liquid funds meaning it would be unable 
to meet its contractual liabilities as they fall due.  

Liquidity risk arises where the Group, through its subsidiaries, 
has  contractual  credit  obligations  that  can  be  placed  under 
stress  during  times  of 
illiquidity.  The  Group  generally 
accesses wholesale funding markets or builds a core portfolio 
of liquid assets or buffers as additional sources of liquidity that 
can be utilised during such times.  

Page | 13  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

RISK MANAGEMENT 

Controls and mitigation 
Overall, the Group’s liquidity profile is resistant to stress as the 
Group: 

  Has  a  positively  matched  funding  profile  and  does 
not engage in maturity transformation which means 
that on a cumulative mismatch position the Group is 
forecast  to be able to  meet all liabilities as they fall 
due;  

Regulatory risk 
Regulatory risk is the risk of material breach of regulation.  

The Group holds a Class 1 (1) Banking Licence in the IOM and 
is  accordingly  regulated  by  the  Financial  Services  Authority 
(“FSA”).  The  Group  also  holds  permissions  with  the  UK’s 
Financial  Conduct  Authority  (“FCA”)  pertaining  to  regulated 
credit  activities,  and  other  specified  regulated  products  and 
services in the UK. 

  Maintains an adequate liquidity buffer; and 

  Has no exposure to the interbank lending market.  

The  risk  of  regulatory  breach  arises  through  a  failure  to 
identify, assess and apply applicable regulation; or a failure to 
adhere to the applicable regulation as applied. 

The  Group’s  liquidity  position  is  monitored  on  a  daily  basis 
against  internal  and  external  agreed  limits.  The  Group  also 
has a Liquidity Contingency Policy and Liquidity Contingency 
Committee  should  a  liquidity  crisis  or  potential  liquidity 
disruption event occur.  

Monitoring  and  complying  with  the  requirements  of  existing 
regulation across numerous regulatory bodies, along with the 
rapid pace and volume of regulatory change is a key risk. The 
risk is compounded due to the size of the Group, and the need 
to maintain a manageable cost of compliance. 

Interest rate risk 
Interest rate risk refers to the current or prospective risk to the 
Bank's capital and earnings arising from adverse movements 
in interest rates that affect the Bank's banking book positions. 

The  principal  potential  interest  rate  risk  that  the  Group  is 
exposed  to  is  the  risk  that  the  fixed  interest  rate  and  term 
profile  of  its  deposit  base  differs  materially  from  the  fixed 
interest  rate  and  term  profile of  its  asset  base,  or  basis  and 
term structure risk.  

Controls and mitigation 

 

 

 

 

Funding profile: Interest rate risk for the Group is not 
deemed to be material currently due to the Group’s 
positively matched funding profile. In a rising interest 
rate  environment,  due  to  the  nature  of  the  Group’s 
products  and  its  matched  funded  profile,  it  should 
theoretically  be  able  to  change  its  lending  rate  to 
match any corresponding change in its cost of funds;  

The  Group  attempts  to  efficiently  match  its  deposit 
taking to its funding requirements;  

The maturity profile of the Group’s loan book through 
staged repayments means interest risk is difficult to 
hedge  effectively  so  the  Group  does  not  currently 
hedge against this risk, and is therefore not exposed 
to  any  additional  market  interest  rate  risk  in  this 
respect; and 

Funding  cost:  The  Group  would  be  exposed  to 
potential risk if its cost of funds, which is linked to the 
cost of retail deposits, and ultimately the UK banks’ 
base rate, was to increase and it was unable, due to 
a  competitive  lending  environment,  to  raise  its 
lending rate correspondingly. The Group’s three year 
plan allows for an increase in its cost of funds, but the 
Group  accepts  that  these  assumptions  may  not 
reflect  the  timing  of  any  interest  rate  rise  or  the 
quantum of any increase.  

Controls and mitigation 
The  Group  remains  well  placed  to  meet  the  regulatory 
challenges that bring change to the macro environment.  

Regulatory risks continue to be mitigated by themed and ad-
hoc compliance monitoring reviews which are driven using a 
risk-based approach to ensure resource is directed to areas of 
potential  material  risk.  The  monitoring  plan  is  approved 
annually by the ARCC. Monitoring reviews are supplemented 
by ongoing staff training and guidance. 

Wherever  possible,  legislative  and  regulatory  requirements 
are built into relevant administration systems, with appropriate 
monitoring  and  exception  reporting  processes  in  place  to 
monitor compliance. 

The  Group  maintains  a  watching  brief  on  the  regulatory 
environment and, as active members of a number of IOM and 
UK trade bodies, it receives additional regulatory updates and 
guidance  on  proposed  legislative  and  regulatory  issues. 
Upstream  regulatory  changes  are  tracked  and  assessed  for 
impact  by  the  Compliance  Department  and  material  items 
reported to the ARCC. 

Reputation risk 
Reputation  risk  is  the  risk of  loss  resulting  from damages to 
the Group’s reputation, in lost revenue or increased costs; or 
destruction of Shareholder value. 

Controls and mitigation 
The Group mitigates this risk by ensuring that its key risks are 
identified  and  managed,  with  an  impact  assessment  of  any 
potential  or  actual  issues  considering  the  impact  to  the 
Group’s reputation. The Group actively seeks to minimise the 
occurrence of events or issues which could give rise to loss or 
negative  feedback,  and actively  manages  the  impact should 
issues occur.  

Page | 14  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 

Corporate governance report  
The  Board  is  committed  to  best  practice  in  corporate 
governance.  Directors  have  agreed  to  comply  with  the 
provisions  of 
the  Quoted  Companies  Alliance  (“QCA”) 
Corporate Governance Code for Small and Mid-Size Quoted 
Companies to the extent which is appropriate to its nature and 
scale  of  operations.  This  report  illustrates  how  the  Group 
complies with those principles. 

QCA  Principle  1:  Establish  a  strategy  and  business  model 
which promote long-term value for Shareholders 
The immediate strategy and business operations of the Group 
are set out in the Strategic Report. 

The Group’s strategy and business model and amendments 
thereto, are developed by the Chief Executive Officer (“CEO”) 
and his senior management team, and approved by the Board. 
The  management  team,  led  by  the  CEO,  is  responsible  for 
implementing the strategy and managing the business at an 
operational level.  

The  Group’s  overall strategic objective  is  to capitalise on  its 
unique position as owning the only independent Bank within 
the  British  Crown  Dependencies  by  developing  core 
businesses  within 
financial  services  sector,  both 
organically and by considered acquisitions. 

the 

The  Group  has  a  balanced  portfolio  of  regulated  and 
unregulated operations, all of which are managed on a risk-
based  and  prudential  approach.  The  principal  activities 
include: deposit taking; lending to consumer and commercial 
markets  in  the  IOM  and  the  UK;  the  provision  of  dedicated 
financial  advice,  especially  in  the  areas  of  pensions  and 
general 
foreign  currency  and  payment 
services. 

insurance;  and 

The Group’s investor relations activities encompass dialogue 
with both institutional and private investors. From time to time, 
MFG attends private investor events, providing an opportunity 
for  those  investors  to  meet  with  representatives  from  the 
Group in a more informal setting. 

QCA  Principle  3:  Take  into  account  wider  stakeholder  and 
social  responsibilities  and  their  implications  for  long-term 
success 
The Group is aware of its corporate social responsibilities and 
the need to maintain effective working relationships across a 
range  of  stakeholder  groups.  These  include  not  only  the 
Group’s 
regulatory 
partners, 
authorities, but also customers, be they depositors, borrowers 
or  seeking  financial  advice.  The  Group’s  operations  and 
working  methodologies  take  account  of  the  requirement  to 
balance  the  needs  of  all  of  these  stakeholder  groups  while 
maintaining  focus  on  the  Board’s  primary  responsibility  to 
promote  the  success  of  the  Group  for  the  benefit  of  its 
members as a whole. 

employees, 

suppliers, 

  Shareholders – where appropriate Shareholder feedback 
is discussed at the Board, with any actions agreed being 
tracked  to  completion  by  the  Company  Secretary. 
Shareholders have an opportunity to raise questions to 
the  Board,  in  person  or  via  a  nominee,  at  the  Annual 
General  Meeting.  In  addition, the  CEO  meets  with  and 
addresses Shareholder concerns where appropriate; 

  Employees – the Group collates employee feedback on 
an  annual  basis,  engages  employees  via  workshops, 
with  all  outputs  analysed  and  visibly  addressed  by  the 
Executives of the operational subsidiaries that form the 
Group;  with  the  aim  being  to  build  an  engaged, 
committed and enthusiastic workforce;  

The  Group  has  adopted  a  portfolio  approach  to  its  strategic 
assets  and  is  not  dependent  on  one  particular  platform 
technology. The Directors believe that this approach helps to 
mitigate any concentration risk. 

  Partners and suppliers – the Executive and Management 
regularly meet with our partners and suppliers to ensure 
the  needs  of  all  parties  are  understood  in  order  to 
achieve continued excellent working relations; 

The Group largely operates in an inherently heavily regulated 
sector and this is reflected in the emphasis on compliance and 
the provision of excellent customer service. 

In  executing  the  Group’s  strategy  and  operational  plans, 
management  will  typically  confront  a  range  of  day-to-day 
challenges  associated  with  risks  and  uncertainties,  and  will 
seek to deploy the identified mitigation steps to manage these 
risks as they manifest themselves.  

QCA Principle 2: Seek to understand and meet Shareholder 
needs and expectations 
The Group, via the CEO, seeks to maintain a regular dialogue 
with both existing and potential new Shareholders in order to 
communicate  the  Group’s  strategy  and  to  understand  the 
needs and expectations of Shareholders. 

Beyond  the  Annual  General  Meeting,  the  CEO  and,  where 
appropriate, other members of the senior management team 
will  meet  with  investors  and  analysts  to  provide  them  with 
updates  on  the  Group’s  business  and  to  obtain  feedback 
regarding the market’s expectations of the Group. 

  Customers  –  are  at  the  heart  of  all  we  do,  the  Group 
operates  with  a  shared  vision  and  set  of  values.  The 
values  instil  a  sense  of  how  all  staff  form  a  part  of  the 
customer journey. Feedback is encouraged at all points 
of  contact,  it  is  proactively  enacted  upon  as  it  aids  the 
identification of process and system enhancements; and 

  Environment  -  The  Group  recognises  the  2020  QCA 
integration  of  ESG  and 
the 
recommendations  on 
framework  across 
reporting 
alignment  with  a 
organisations.  This  is  a  fast-moving  agenda  with  the 
consolidation  of  voluntary  frameworks  and  growth  of 
international statutory reporting frameworks since those 
recommendations  were  published  and  we  continue  to 
monitor this evolution and what  it means for  the Group 
with  interest.  Notwithstanding  this,  integration  of  ESG 
across the Group and in its stewardship is on-going as 
we identify the material ESG issues that are important to 
us and our stakeholders and respond to them. The Bank 
is now into its third year of responding to ESG integration 
and provides the model that other Group subsidiaries are 
also following. 

Page | 15  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 

QCA  Principle  4:  Embed  effective 
risk  management, 
considering  both  opportunities  and  threats,  throughout  the 
organisation 
The Board is responsible for the systems of risk management 
and internal control and for reviewing their effectiveness by a 
series of committees, overseen by the ARCC, and reviewed 
by  Internal  Audit.  The  internal  controls  are  designed  to 
manage rather than eliminate risk and provide reasonable but 
not absolute assurance against material misstatement or loss. 
Through the activities of the ARCC, which meets at least six 
times per year, the effectiveness of these internal controls is 
formally reviewed four times per year. 

A comprehensive budgeting process is completed once a year 
and  is  reviewed  and  approved  by  the  Board.  The  Group’s 
results, compared with the budget, are reported to the Board 
on a monthly basis. 

The Group maintains appropriate insurance cover in respect 
of actions taken against the Directors because of their roles, 
as well as against material loss or claims against the Group. 
The  insured  values  and  type  of  cover  are  comprehensively 
reviewed on at least an annual basis. 

The senior management team meets weekly to consider new 
risks  and  opportunities  presented  to  the  Group,  making 
recommendations  to  the  Board  and  /  or  the  ARCC  as 
appropriate. 

The Directors consider they provide all necessary information 
to  assess  the  Company’s  position,  performance,  business 
model and strategy. 

QCA  Principle  5:  Maintain  the  board  as  a  well-functioning, 
balanced team led by the chair 
The  Board  currently  comprises  five  Non-executive  Directors 
and four Executive Directors. 

All of the Directors are subject to election by Shareholders at 
the first Annual General Meeting after their appointment to the 
Board and will continue to seek re-election at least once every 
three years. 

Directors’ biographies are set out on pages 19 and 20. 

The Board is responsible to  the Shareholders for the proper 
management of the Group and meets at least four times a year 
to set the overall direction and strategy of the Group, to review 
operational  and  financial  performance,  and  to  advise  on 
management  appointments.  All  key  operational  and 
investment decisions are subject to Board approval. 

The Board considers itself to be sufficiently independent. The 
QCA  Code  suggests  that  a  board  should  have  at  least  two 
independent  non-executive  directors.  The  Board  considers 
that  four  Non-executive  Directors,  namely  Alan  Clarke 
(Chairman of the ARCC), David Gibson, Gregory Jones and 
John Spellman, are regarded as independent under the QCA 
Code’s guidance for determining such independence. 

Non-executive  Directors  receive  their  fees  in  the  form  of  a 
basic  cash  emolument.  The  CEO  is  the  only  Director  who 
holds options over the Group’s shares. The number and terms 
are found on page 27. 

The option grant  concerned is not deemed to  be significant, 
either for the individual Executive Director or in aggregate. The 
current remuneration structure for the Board’s Non-executive 
Directors is deemed to be proportionate. 

QCA Principle 6: Ensure that between them the directors have 
the necessary up-to-date experience, skills and capabilities 
The  Board  considers  that  all  of  the  Non-executive  Directors 
are of sufficient competence and calibre to add strength and 
objectivity to its activities, and bring considerable experience 
in regulatory, financial and operational development within the 
financial service sector in both the IOM and the UK. 

The Directors’ biographies are set out on pages 19 and 20. 

The Board regularly reviews the composition of the Board to 
ensure that it has the necessary breadth and depth of skills to 
support the ongoing development of the Group. 

The  Chairman,  in  conjunction  with  the  Company  Secretary, 
ensures  that  the  Directors’  knowledge  is  kept  up-to-date  on 
key  issues  and  developments  pertaining  to  the  Group,  its 
operational environment and to the Directors’ responsibilities 
as  members  of  the  Board.  During  the  course  of  the  year, 
Directors  receive  updates  from  the  Company  Secretary  and 
various  external  advisers  on  a  number  of  corporate 
governance matters. 

Directors’  service  contracts  or  appointment  letters  make 
provision for a Director to seek personal advice in furtherance 
of  his  or  her  duties  and  responsibilities,  normally  via  the 
Company Secretary. 

QCA Principle 7: Evaluate board performance based on clear 
and relevant objectives, seeking continuous improvement 
The  Board  has  an  internal  process  for  evaluation  of  its  own 
performance, that of its committees and individual Directors, 
including  the  Chairman.  This  process  is  conducted  annually 
and  last  took place  in  July 2021,  with  no  substantive  issues 
arising.  

The  Board  may  utilise  the  results  of  the  evaluation  process 
when  considering  the  adequacy  of  the  composition  of  the 
Board and for succession planning. 

QCA Principle 8: Promote a corporate culture that is based on 
ethical values and behaviours 
The Board seeks to maintain the highest standards of integrity 
and probity  in  the conduct of  the  Group’s  operations.  These 
values  are  enshrined  in  the  written  policies  and  working 
practices  adopted  by  all  employees  in  the  Group.  An  open 
culture 
the  Group,  with  regular 
communications to staff regarding progress and staff feedback 
regularly  sought.  The  senior  management  team  regularly 
monitors  the  Group’s  cultural  environment  and  seeks  to 
address  any  concerns  that  may  arise,  escalating  these  to 
Board level as necessary. 

is  encouraged  within 

The Group is committed to providing a safe environment for its 
staff and all other parties for which the Group has a legal or 
moral  responsibility  in  this  area.  This  is  enshrined  in  the 
Group’s health and safety policy. 

Page | 16  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 

QCA  Principle  9:  Maintain  governance  structures  and 
processes that are fit for purpose and support good decision- 
making by the board 
The role of the Board  
The Board is collectively responsible for the long-term success 
of  the  organisation.  Its  principal  function  is  to  determine  the 
strategy and policies of the Group within an effective control 
framework which enables risk to be assessed and managed. 
The Governance Framework is reviewed to ensure it remains 
fit  for  purpose  on  an  annual  basis  and  is  approved  by  the 
Board. 

The  Board  ensures  that  the  necessary  financial  and  human 
resources are in place for the Group to meet its objectives and 
that  business  and  management  performances  are  reviewed. 
Furthermore, the Board ensures that the Group operates within 
its  constitution,  relevant  legislation  and  regulation  and  that 
proper accounting records and effective systems of business 
control are established, maintained, documented and audited.  

There are at  least four formal Board meetings each year.  All 
Board members have the benefit, at the Group’s expense, of 
liability  insurance  in  respect  of  their  responsibilities  as 
Directors  and  have  access  to  independent  legal  or  other 
professional  advice  if  required.  The  Board  has  a  formal 
schedule  of  matters  which  are  reserved  for  its  consideration 
and  it  has  established  three  committees  to  consider  specific 
issues  in  greater  detail,  being  the  ARCC,  the  Remuneration 
Committee  and  the  Nomination  Committee.  The  Terms  of 
Reference for each of these Committees are published on the 
Group’s website www.mfg.im.  

There is a clear separation of the roles of CEO and Executive 
Chairman. 

Chairman  
The Chairman is responsible for leading the Board,  ensuring 
its effectiveness in all aspects of its role, promoting a culture of 
openness  of  debate  and  communicating  with  the  Group’s 
members  on  behalf  of  the  Board.  The  Chairman  sets  the 
direction of the Board and promotes a culture of openness and 
debate  by  facilitating  the  effective  contribution  of  Non-
executive  Directors  and  ensuring  constructive  relations 
between  Executive  and  Non-executive  Directors.  The 
Chairman also ensures that Directors receive accurate, timely 
and  clear  information.  In  doing  so,  this  fosters  a  positive 
corporate governance culture throughout the Group.  

CEO 
The  CEO  is  responsible  for  managing  the  Group’s  business 
and operations within the parameters set by the Board.  

Non-executive Directors  
The  Non-executive  Directors  are  responsible  for  bringing 
independent judgement to the discussions held by the Board, 
using  their  breadth  of  experience  and  understanding  of  the 
business.  Their  key  responsibilities  are  to  constructively 
challenge and contribute to strategic proposals, and to monitor 
performance, 
resources,  and  standards  of  conduct, 
compliance and control, whilst providing support to executive 
management in developing the Group. 

The  Board  has  established  an  ARCC,  a  Remuneration 
Committee  and  a  Nomination  Committee  with  formally 
delegated duties and responsibilities.  

Group Audit, Risk and Compliance Committee (“ARCC”) 
The ARCC meets at least six times each year and comprises 
of 
four  Non-executive  Directors,  currently  Alan  Clarke 
(Chairman),  David  Gibson,  Gregory  Jones  and  John 
Spellman.  Representatives  from  Compliance  and  Risk,  the 
Internal  and  External  Auditor  and  executive  management 
attend by invitation. Its role is to be responsible for reviewing 
the  integrity  of  the  financial  statements  and  the  balance  of 
information disclosed in the accompanying Directors’ Report, 
to  review  the  effectiveness  of  internal  controls  and  risk 
management  systems, 
the 
effectiveness of the internal audit function and to consider and 
recommend to  the Board (for approval by the members) the 
appointment  or  re-appointment  of  the  External  Auditor.  The 
ARCC reviews and monitors the External Auditor’s objectivity, 
competence, effectiveness and independence, ensuring that 
if it or its associates are invited to undertake non-audit work it 
will not compromise auditor objectivity and independence. 

to  monitor  and 

review 

Group Remuneration Committee (“REMCO”) 
The REMCO meets at least twice a year and comprises of two 
Non-executive  Directors,  currently  Alan  Clarke  (Chairman) 
and  David  Gibson,  with  the  Executive  Directors,  Head  of 
Human  Resources  and  external  advisers  attending  by 
invitation where appropriate. It is responsible, amongst other 
matters,  for  determining  the  remuneration  of  the  Executive 
Directors, the Company Secretary and other members of the 
management.  Committee  members  do  not  take  part  in 
discussions  concerning 
remuneration.  The 
Chairman and CEO determine Non-executive Director fees. 

their  own 

The  Directors  believe  that  the  above  disclosures  constitute 
sufficient disclosure to meet the QCA Code’s requirement for 
a Remuneration Committee Report.  

Group Nomination Committee (“NOMCO”) 
The NOMCO is comprised of the whole Board. It is chaired by 
the  Chairman  of  the  Board  and  is  responsible  for  making 
recommendations  to  the  Board  on  matters  relating  to  the 
composition  of  the  Board,  including  Executive  and  Non-
executive  Director  succession  planning,  the  appointment  of 
new Directors and re-election of existing Directors. 

Appointments to the Board  
The  principal  purpose  of  the  Nomination  Committee  is  to 
undertake the assessment of the balance of skills, experience, 
independence  and  knowledge  on  the  Board  and  subsidiary 
boards against the requirements of the business, with a view 
to determining whether any shortages exist. Having completed 
the  assessment,  the  Committee  makes  recommendations  to 
the  Board  accordingly.  Appointments  to  the  Board  are made 
on merit, with due regard to the benefits of diversity. Within this 
context,  the  paramount  objective  is  the  selection  of  the  best 
candidate, irrespective of background, and it is the view of the 
Board that establishing quotas or targets for the diversity of the 
Board is not appropriate.  

All  Group  Director  appointments  must  be  approved  by  the 
Company’s  Nominated  Adviser,  as  required  under  the  AIM 
Rules, before they are appointed to the Group Board.  

Page | 17  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 

Prior to appointment, Non-executive Directors are required to 
demonstrate  that  they  are  able  to  allocate  sufficient  time  to 
undertake their duties. 

Re-election  
The Group’s Rules require that all Directors are submitted for 
election  at  the  AGM  following  their  first  appointment  to  the 
Board and one third of the Directors are subject to retirement 
by  rotation  on  an  annual  basis  to  refresh  the  Board, 
irrespective of performance. 

The Corporate Governance Manual also contains a schedule 
of matters specifically reserved for Board decision or approval 
and sets out the Company’s share dealing code and its public 
interest disclosure (“whistle-blowing”) policy and procedures. 

Board and committee attendance 
The  number  of  formal  scheduled  Board  and  Committee 
meetings held and attended by Directors during the year was 
as follows:  

Jim Mellon 
Denham Eke 
Douglas Grant 
James Smeed ^ 
Gregory Bailey 
Alan Clarke 
David Gibson 
Gregory Jones * 
John Spellman 

Board  ARCC  REMCO  NOMCO 
-/1 
1/1 
1/1 
- 
1/1 
1/1 
1/1 
- 
1/1 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
19/19 
19/19 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
9/9 
9/9 
1/1 
9/9 

5/6 
6/6 
5/6 
1/1 
5/6 
6/6 
6/6 
1/1 
6/6 

^ James Smeed appointed on 3 November 2021 
* Gregory Jones appointed on 3 November 2021 

QCA  Principle  10:  Communicate  how  the  company  is 
governed  and  is  performing  by  maintaining  a  dialogue  with 
Shareholders and other relevant stakeholders 
The Group places a high priority on regular communications 
with its various stakeholder groups and aims to ensure that all 
communications  concerning  the  Group’s  activities  are  clear, 
fair  and  accurate.  The  Group’s  website  is  regularly  updated 
and users can register to be alerted when announcements or 
details  of  presentations  and  events  are  posted  onto  the 
website. 

Notices of General Meetings of the Company can be found on: 
https://www.mfg.im/investor-centre/regulatory-news. 

The  results  of  voting  on  all  resolutions  in  future  general 
meetings will be posted to the Group’s website, including any 
actions to be taken as a result of resolutions for which votes 
against  have  been  received  from  at  least  20  per  cent  of 
independent Shareholders. 

Approval  
This report was approved by the Board on 9 March 2022 and 
signed on its behalf by: 

Jim Mellon  
Executive Chairman  
9 March 2022 

Page | 18  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS, OFFICERS AND ADVISERS 

Executive Directors 

Denham Eke (70) ‡ 
Executive Vice Chairman 
Denham Eke is the Managing Director of Burnbrae 
international  asset 
Group  Limited,  a  private 
management  company.  He  began  his  career  in 
stockbroking  with  Sheppards  &  Chase  before 
moving into corporate planning for Hogg Robinson 
plc, a major multinational insurance broker. He is a 
director of many years standing of both public and 
financial 
private  companies 
services,  property,  mining,  and  manufacturing 
sectors.  

involved 

the 

in 

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board on 2 November 2007 and 
Executive Vice Chairman on 3 November 2021.   

Jim Mellon (65)‡ 
Executive Chairman 
Jim  Mellon 
is  a  well-known  and  successful 
entrepreneur,  author  and  economic  commentator, 
starting  his  career  in  fund  management  and  now 
including  biopharma,  property,  mining  and 
information 
technology  amongst  his  many 
investments. He holds directorships in a number of 
companies,  both  quoted  and  unquoted,  including 
the  chairmanship  of  Juvenescence  Limited  and 
being an executive director of Agronomics Limited. 
He, together with Burnbrae Group Limited, of which 
he 
the  beneficial  owner,  hold  a  18.83% 
shareholding of Manx Financial Group PLC. He is 
the founder, principal shareholder and chairman of 
the  Endurance  RP  Limited,  quoted  on  the  Hong 
Kong Stock Exchange. 

is 

Appointment 
Appointed to  the Board on  2 November 2007  and 
Executive Chairman on 12 February 2009. 

 James Smeed (37) ‡ 
Group Finance Director 
James Smeed has over 15 years’ financial services 
experience, having started his career with KPMG in 
audit  and  assisting  in  transaction  services.  He 
joined the Group in August 2012 as Group Head of 
Finance and was appointed to the Bank’s Board as 
Finance  Director  in  2017.  He  is  both  a  Chartered 
Accountant  and  a  Chartered  Tax  Adviser  and 
Treasurer of the Isle of Man Bankers Association. 

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board as Group Finance Director 
on 3 November 2021. 

Douglas Grant (57) ‡ 
Chief Executive Officer 
Douglas  Grant  has  over  30  years’  experience 
working in finance, initially with Scottish Power, 
before  moving  to  the  industrial  sector  to  work 
with  ICI  and  then  Allenwest.  Prior  to  joining 
Manx  Financial  Group  PLC,  he  was  finance 
director  of  various  UK  and Isle  of Man private 
sector  companies  and  has  extensive  capital 
markets  experience.  He  is  a  professionally 
qualified banker with an executive MBA. 

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board on 14 January 2010 and 
Chief Executive Officer on 3 November 2021.  

Page | 19  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS, OFFICERS AND ADVISERS 

Non-executive Directors 

 Alan Clarke (71)‡†* ≠  
Non-executive Director 
Alan  Clarke  is  a chartered accountant  and former 
senior partner of Ernst & Young during which time 
he worked closely with HSBC offshore operations in 
both  the  Channel  Islands  and  the  Isle  of  Man. 
Currently,  he  specialises  in corporate  finance  and 
strategic    consultancy,  advising  a  variety  of  both 
listed and private companies. He holds several non-
executive  directorships  and  is  a  past  President  of 
ICAEW Manchester. 

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board on 2 November 2007. He is 
Chairman  of  the  Audit,  Risk  and  Compliance 
Committee  and  Chairman  of  the  Remuneration 
Committee.  

David Gibson (74) ‡†* ≠ 
Non-executive Director 
David  Gibson  qualified  as  a  certified  accountant 
whilst  holding  posts  with  Shell-Mex  and  BP  and 
CIBA-Geigy throughout the UK and abroad, before 
transferring  into  treasury  management  in  senior 
positions  with  Turner  and  Newall  and  Westland 
Helicopters  where  he  qualified  as  a  corporate 
treasurer.  He  joined  the Trustee  Savings  Bank  of 
the  Channel  Islands  as  finance  director,  prior  to 
becoming general manager finance at TSB Retail 
Bank where he gained his formal qualifications as 
a  banker.  Prior  to  retiring  from  executive  life  for 
family  reasons,  he  was  group  finance  director  of 
Portman  Building  Society.  He  is  also  deputy 
chairman of two property investment companies. 

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board on 12 February 2009. He is 
Chairman of Conister Bank Limited. 

Gregory Bailey (66) ‡ 
Non-executive Director 

of  NYSE 

Gregory  Bailey,  founded  Palantir  Group  Inc 
which made successful investments in bio-tech 
company  start-ups  and  financings,  and  is 
currently CEO of Juvenescence Ltd, chairman 
of  Portage  Biotech  Inc,  a  CSE-traded  drug 
development  company  and  non-executive 
director 
Biohaven 
Pharmaceuticals Holding Company.  He is also 
founder and chairman of Chelsea Avondale, a 
property  and 
insurance  and 
causualty 
reinsurance  group.  Along  with  comprehensive 
experience  in  finance  and  healthcare,  he  has 
served  on  many  public  company  boards  and 
brings to the Group an extensive involvement in 
corporate governance.  

traded 

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board on 7 February 2018. 

  Legend 

*   Member of the Audit, Risk and Compliance 

Committee 

† Member of the Remuneration Committee 
‡ Member of the Nominations Committee 
≠  Independent Non-executive Director 

Gregory Jones (63) ‡* ≠ 
Non-executive Director 

Gregory  Jones  was  called  to  the  UK  Bar  in  1982 
and subsequently joined KPMG Isle of Man where 
he spent 29 years before retiring in October 2019 
as  Head  of Tax. He  currently  provides  tax  advice 
for a leading Isle of Man based firm of advocates 
and  is  a  director  of  a  local  Corporate  Service 
Provider. He is a member of the Chartered Institute 
of Taxation. 

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board 3 November 2021. 

 John Spellman (55) ‡* ≠ 
Non-executive Director 
John  Spellman  is  both  a qualified  accountant  and 
banker.  He  spent  his  early years  in  banking,  fund 
management and accountancy, specialising in the 
various parts of the offshore industry before being 
appointed  managing  director  of  Clerical  Medical 
Offshore.    He  transferred  to  the  UK  as  chief 
operating  officer  within  Clerical  Medical  Financial 
Services before being appointed managing director 
of  HBoS  Financial  Services.  He  has  worked  with 
and created a number of successful businesses and 
has  wide  experience  liaising  with  government 
regulators.   He  has held  approved status with  the 
Isle of Man FSA in various roles and has acted as 
strategic  advisor  to  the  Isle  of  Man  government, 
specialising in finance and foreign direct investment 
for over 11 years.  

Appointment 
Appointed  to  the  Board  on  4  May  2020.  He  is 
Chairman of Edgewater Associates Limited. 

Page | 20  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS, OFFICERS AND ADVISERS 

Company Secretary    

Lesley Crossley (54) 
Company Secretary 

Lesley  Crossley  is  a  Fellow  of  The  Chartered 
Institute  of  Secretaries  and Administrators  and  an 
Associate of the Chartered Insurance Institute.  She 
has over 30 years of wide-ranging experience in the 
financial  services  industry  both  in  the  UK  and  the 
Isle of Man and has held the position of Company 
Secretary  with  a  number  of  Isle  of  Man  and 
international companies. 

Appointment 
Re-appointed  as  the  Company  Secretary  on  2 
September  2019  after  re-joining  the  Group.  She 
also held the position from September 2009 to June 
2018. 

Advisers 

Registered Office 
Clarendon House 
Victoria Street 
Douglas 
Isle of Man IM1 2LN 

Registered Agent 
CW Corporate Services Limited 
Bank Chambers 
15-19 Athol Street  
Douglas 
Isle of Man IM1 1LB 

Legal Advisers 
As to Isle of Man law 
Long & Humphrey 
The Old Courthouse 
Athol Street 
Douglas 
Isle of Man IM1 1LD 

As to English law 
Hill Dickinson LLP 
The Broadgate Tower 
20 Primrose Street 
London EC21 2EW 

Independent Auditor 
KPMG Audit LLC 
Heritage Court 
41 Athol Street 
Douglas 
Isle of Man IM1 1LA 

Principal Banker 
National Westminster Bank plc 
250 Bishopsgate 
London EC2M 4AA 

Consulting Actuaries 
Boal & Co Ltd 
Marquis House 
Isle of Man Business Park 
Douglas 
Isle of Man IM2 2QZ 

Nominated Advisor  
and Broker 
Beaumont Cornish  
Building 3 
Chiswick Park 
566 Chiswick High Road 
London W4 5YA 

Registrar 
Computershare Investor  
Services (Jersey) Limited 
13 Castle Street 
St Helier 
Jersey JE1 1ES 

Presentation  of  Annual  Report  and 
Accounts 
Presented here are the Annual Report and 
Accounts of Manx Financial Group PLC. 

Company Information 
The Annual and Interim Reports, along with 
other supplementary information of interest 
to  Shareholders,  are 
its
website.  The  address  of  the  website  is 
investor 
www.mfg.im  which 
relations information and contact details. 

included  on 

includes 

Page | 21  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

AUDIT, RISK AND COMPLIANCE COMMITTEE  

Dear Shareholders 
I am pleased to set out below an account of the ARCC’s role 
and activities during 2021 and up to the date of publication of 
this Annual Report.  

Due  to  its  adoption  of  the  QCA  Corporate  Governance 
standard,  the  Committee  reassessed  the  adequacy  of  its 
terms  of  reference  and  its  function  bearing  in  mind  the 
requirements of this standard. 

the  Nomination  Committee, 

Membership 
Members  of  the  ARCC  are  appointed  by  the  Board,  on  the 
recommendation  of 
in 
consultation  with  the  Chairman  of  the  Committee.  The 
Committee  shall  be  made  up  of  at  least  2  members.  All 
members of the Committee shall be Non-executive Directors 
and  at  least  one  of  whom  shall  have  recent  and  relevant 
financial experience with a professional qualification from one 
of the professional accountancy bodies. The Chairman of the 
Board shall not be a member of the Committee.  

Appointments to the Committee shall be for a period of up to 
3-years, which may be extended by the Board for a further 3-
year  period  (or,  in  exceptional  circumstances,  two  further  3 
year  periods),  provided  the  Director  remains  independent.  
The  Board  may  approve  annual  extensions  to  any  Director 
who has served 3 consecutive terms. 

The Board shall appoint the Chairman of the Committee who 
shall  be  a  Non-executive  Director.    In  the  absence  of  the 
Chairman of the Committee and / or an appointed deputy, the 
remaining members present shall elect one of themselves to 
chair the meeting. 

The Committee shall meet at least six times a year.  Of these, 
two  will  be  held  to  review  the  annual  and  interim  financial 
statements.  Outside  of  the  formal  meeting  programme,  the 
Chairman of the Committee will maintain a dialogue with key 
individuals involved in the Company’s governance. 

Members 

Appointed  

Alan Clarke (Chairman)  2 February 2007 
David Gibson 
Gregory Jones 
John Spellman 

13 February 2009 
3 November 2021 
4 May 2020 

Number of 
meetings 
attended 
9/9 
9/9 
1/1 
9/9 

Only  members  of  the  Committee  have  the  right  to  attend 
Committee  meetings.    However  other  individuals  may  be 
invited by the Chairman of the Committee to attend all or part 
of any meeting as and when appropriate.  

The ARCC holds separate meetings with the Head of Internal 
Audit, Head of Risk and Compliance and our External Auditor, 
KPMG Audit LLC. 

The  Chairman  of  the  Board,  the  Executive  Directors  and 
executive management are invitees to meetings of the ARCC 
but are excluded from the separate meetings held between the 
ARCC and the External Auditor. 

Execution of functions 
The ARCC has executed its duties and responsibilities during 
the year in accordance with its terms of reference as it relates 
to auditor independence, assisting the Board in its evaluation 
of  its  control  environment  and  internal  controls  including 
information systems and accounting practices. 

During  the  year  under  review,  the  Committee  considered 
among other matters, the following: 

Financial reporting and annual financial statements: 

  Considered the annual financial statements with the 
External  Auditor,  Executive  Directors 
and 
management  and  reviewed  the  appropriateness  of 
significant  judgements,  estimates  and  accounting 
policies; 

  Reviewed  and  recommended  to  the  Board  for 

approval: 

o  Unaudited condensed interim results for the 

period-ended 30 June 2021; 

o  Audited  MFG  PLC  Group  and  subsidiary 
annual  financial  statements  for  the  year-
ended 31 December 2021; and 
  Discussed  any  significant  and  unusual  accounting 
matters including key audit matters identified by the 
External Auditor. 

External audit: 

  Monitored  and  assessed  the  independence  of  the 
External  Auditor  based  on  reports  received  and 
inquiries made into work performed; 

  Determined  the  nature  and  extent  of  non-audit 

services performed by the External Auditor; 

  Reviewed  and  assessed  the  significance  of  non-

audit fees compared to audit fees; 

  Reviewed  and  agreed  the  external  audit  plan  in 
advance  for  the  year-end  audit  which  set  out  the 
scope of audit, significant risks, areas of audit focus 
and audit timetable; 

  Received a presentation from the External Auditor on 
the  findings  from  their  execution  of  the  audit  plan; 
and 

  Satisfied  itself  as  to  the  expertise  experience  and 

independence of the engagement partner. 

Internal audit: 

  Reviewed and approved the Internal Audit plan; 
  Reviewed  Internal  Audit’s  findings  including  the 
design  and  operating  effectiveness  of  the  internal 
control environment and control activities; and  
  Reviewed Internal Audit’s findings on the adequacy 

and reliability of management information. 

Risk and compliance: 

  Assessed  the  effectiveness  of  the  Group  Risk  and 

Compliance function; 

  Reviewed 

the  Group  Risk  and  Compliance 
department  findings  on  the  effectiveness  of  the 
Group’s regulatory controls; 

  Recommended  a 

revision  of 

the  Risk  and 

Compliance policies for Board approval; and 

  Recommended  a  revision  of  the  Internal  Capital 
Adequacy Assessment Process for Board approval. 

Page | 22  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

AUDIT, RISK AND COMPLIANCE COMMITTEE  

External Auditor’s independence  
KPMG Audit LLC has been the Group’s external auditor since 
2007. 

Consideration was given to the non-audit work performed by 
the External Auditor. The ratio of non-audit fees to audit fees 
for the year was 0.01 to 1 (2020: 0.06 to 1). Non-audit services 
related  to  transaction  services  and  tax  advisory  services. 
Services were performed by a separate team to the audit team 
to safeguard against the self-review threat to independence. 

The ARCC obtained assurance from the External Auditor that 
internal  governance  processes  within  KPMG  Audit  LLC 
support  and  demonstrate  its  claim  of  independence.  This 
assurance  was  provided  through  the  receipt  of  an  ISA  (UK) 
260 letter. 

The ARCC is satisfied with the independence of KPMG Audit 
LLC. 

Key accounting matter 
Loan  impairment  –  wholesale  funding  and  individual  finance 
agreements 
The  entity  is  required  by  the  financial  reporting  framework  to 
calculate  impairment  using  the  expected  credit  loss  model. 
Impairment is measured on an instrument by instrument basis 
except  where  instruments  are  grouped,  for  impairment  to  be 
measured on a collective basis under the expected credit loss 
model.  

Loan impairment provisions reflect estimates of the amount and 
timing  of  future  recoveries  which  require  an  assessment  of 
matters  such  as  future  economic  conditions  and  the  value  of 
collateral. Estimates, by their nature, give rise to a higher risk of 
material misstatement due to error or fraud.  

The  effect  of  these  matters  is  that,  as  part  of  the  External 
Auditor’s risk assessment, they determined that the impairment 
provision  has  a  high  degree  of  estimation  uncertainty,  with  a 
potential  range  of  reasonable  outcomes  greater  than  their 
materiality for the financial statements as a whole, and possibly 
many times that amount. 
Impairment of goodwill and intangible assets 
Goodwill and intangible assets are significant and the estimated 
recoverable amount of these balances is subjective due to the 
inherent  uncertainty  involved  in  forecasting  and  discounting 
future  cash  flows  for  the  goodwill  impairment  test  and  in 
performing  a  review  for  indicators  of  impairment  for  intangible 
assets. 

The  effect  of  these  matters  is  that,  as  part  of  the  External 
Auditor’s risk assessment, they have determined that the value 
in use of goodwill has a high degree of estimation uncertainty, 
with a potential range of reasonable outcomes greater than their 
materiality for the financial statements as a whole. 

External Auditor’s reappointment 
The ARCC is responsible for recommending to the Board the 
reappointment of the Group’s External Auditor which, in turn, 
will make a recommendation to its Shareholders. 

It  is  noted  that  with  good  corporate  governance,  an  audit 
tender  process  should  regularly  be  conducted.  With  this  in 
mind, the ARCC commenced an audit tender process for the 
year-ended 31 December 2022. This will allow sufficient time 
to  run  a  comprehensive  and  considered  tender  process 
subject to any delays related to COVID-19. 

Firms outside the Big 4 have been invited to take part in this 
process  so  long  as  they  have  sufficient  resources  and 
expertise  to  merit  their  inclusion.  There  are  no  anticipated 
conflicts  of  interest  noted  at  this  time  and  should  any  arise, 
they will be mitigated appropriately. 

Key accounting matters 
The  ARCC  considered key  accounting  matters  in  relation  to 
the Group’s financial statements and disclosures. The primary 
areas  in  relation  to  2021  and  how  they  were  addressed  are 
detailed below: 

ARCC response 
The ARCC satisfied itself that the internal control environment 
and  control  activities  are  appropriately  designed  and 
implemented.  This  was  supported  by  review  of  Internal  and 
External Audit reports and findings. 

The ARCC reviewed reports from executive management on the 
continued implementation of IFRS 9 and key changes to internal 
processes  and  controls.  The  ARCC  reviewed 
the  key 
assumptions used by management such as Loss Given Default, 
Loss Rates, Probability of Default on a quarterly basis. 

The ARCC satisfied itself that the internal control environment 
and  control  activities  are  appropriately  designed  and 
implemented.  This  was  supported  by  review  of  Internal  and 
External Audit reports and findings. 

The  ARCC  reviewed  management’s  assessment  of  Goodwill 
and  Intangible  Asset  impairment  and  concluded  that  the 
recoverable amount is appropriate. 

Page | 23  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

AUDIT, RISK AND COMPLIANCE COMMITTEE  

ARCC response 
The ARCC is satisfied that the going concern assessment over 
the Group provides sufficient assurance over the recoverability 
of  the  Company’s  subordinated  loans  and  investment  in 
subsidiaries. 

Key accounting matter 
Carrying  value  of  Company’s  subordinated 
investment in subsidiaries 
The carrying value of the Company’s subordinated loans to and 
investment in subsidiaries represents 97% (2020: 94%) of the 
Parent Company’s total assets.  

loans  and 

The  assessment  of  carrying  value  is  not  at  a  high  risk  of 
significant misstatement or subject to significant judgement as 
the carrying value is supported by the audited net asset value 
of the subsidiaries. 

However,  due  to  its  materiality  in  the  context  of  the  MFG 
financial statements, the External Auditor considered this to be 
the  area  that  had  the  greatest  effect  on  their  audit  of  the 
Company. 

The ARCC has complied with and discharged its responsibilities as set out in its Terms of Reference. 

Alan Clarke 
Chairman 
9 March 2022 

Page | 24  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT 

Dear Shareholders 
On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to present the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report for the year ended 31 December 2021. 

Membership 
Members  of  the  Remuneration  Committee  (“REMCO”)  are 
appointed  by  the  Board,  on  the  recommendation  of  the 
Nomination  Committee  in  consultation  with  the  Chairman  of 
the Committee. The Committee shall be made up of at least 2 
members.  All  members  of  the  Committee  shall  be  Non-
executive Directors. The Chairman of the Board shall not be a 
member of the Committee. 

Appointments to the Committee shall be for a period of up to 
3-years, which may be extended by the Board for a further 3-
year  period  (or,  in  exceptional  circumstances,  two  further  3 
year  periods),  provided  the  Director  remains  independent.  
The  Board  may  approve  annual  extensions  to  any  Director 
who has served 3 consecutive terms. 

The Board shall appoint the Chairman of the Committee who 
shall  be  a  Non-executive  Director.  In  the  absence  of  the 
Chairman of the Committee and/or an appointed deputy, the 
remaining members present shall elect one of themselves to 
chair the meeting. 

The Committee shall meet at least twice a year and at such 
other times as the Chairman of the Committee shall require. 

Membership 

Appointed 

Alan Clarke (Chairman)  13 February 2009 
David Gibson 

12 December 2010 

Number of 
meetings 
attended 
19/19 
19/19 

Only  members  of  the  Committee  have  the  right  to  attend 
Committee  meetings.  However,  other  individuals  may  be 
invited by the Chairman of the Committee to attend all or part 
of any meeting as and when appropriate. 

Areas of focus for 2021 
During the year, the Committee considered the following: 

  Reviewed the overall pay of Executive Directors; 
  Reviewed 
non-discretionary 
overall 

the 

performance related pay scheme for Group staff;  

annual 

  Reviewed and approved all new Group staff appointments 

with annual packages over £50,000; and 

  Reviewed  and  approved  all  changes  to  terms  and 
conditions  of  staff  where  annual  packages  exceeded 
£50,000. 

Remuneration policy 
The  Group’s  Remuneration  Policy  reflects  the  Group’s 
business  strategy  and  objectives  as  well  as  sustained  and 
long-term  value  creation  for  Shareholders.    In  addition,  the 
policy  aims  to  be  fair  and  provide  equality  of  opportunity, 
ensuring that:  

 

the  Group  is  able  to  attract,  develop  and  retain  high-
performing  and  motivated  employees  in  the  competitive 
local IOM and wider UK markets; 

  employees  are  offered  a  competitive  remuneration 
package to encourage enhanced performance and are, in 

a fair and responsible manner, rewarded for their individual 
contribution to the success of the Group; 
it reflects the Group’s culture and values; and  
there  is  full  transparency  of  the  Group’s  Remuneration 
Policy. 

 
 

In line with the Board’s approach, which reflects that adopted 
within  other  comparable  organisations, 
the  Group’s 
Remuneration  Policy  provides  for  the  reward  of  Executive 
Directors through salaries and other benefits.  

Executive Directors’ Emoluments 
The  remuneration  for  Executive  Directors  reflects  their 
responsibilities. 
It  comprises  basic  salary,  performance 
related variable pay when this is considered appropriate, and 
various benefits detailed below.  

Performance  related  payments  are  not  pensionable  and  are 
not contracted.  

As with staff generally, whose salaries are subject to annual 
reviews,  basic  salaries  payable  to  Executive  Directors  are 
reviewed  each  year  with  reference  to  jobs  carrying  similar 
responsibilities in comparable financial organisations, market 
conditions generally and local employment competition in view 
of the Group’s geographical position.  

The  Group  operates  a  non-contractual  discretionary  annual 
performance  related  pay  scheme  based  on  the  trading 
performance  of  the  Group  and  the  individual  employee’s 
performance  assessed  for  the  period  under  review  in  a 
manner which promotes sound risk management and does not 
promote excessive risk taking.   

The non-contractual discretionary annual performance related 
pay scheme may be paid in one year but that does not confer 
any entitlement in future years.  

to 
Performance  assessments  are  conducted  annually 
determine 
the  performance  rating  of  each  employee’s 
achievements against a mix of targets set and agreed at the 
beginning  of  each  year  between  the  employee  and  their 
manager.  No incentives are paid to employees or executives 
where  the  performance  rating  reflects  below  an  agreed 
expected level for the role employed. 

The non-contractual discretionary annual performance related 
pay  scheme  may  be  disbursed  as  a  cash  payment  through 
payroll, share based instruments (including share options) or 
a  mixture  of  both.    An  element  of  deferment  to  align  the 
interests  of  the  employee  to  the  longer  term  performance  of 
the Group may also be included. 

EAL’s  Financial  Advisors  are  salaried  and  commission  is 
calculated on a pre-agreed percentage over target which is set 
at between 2 to 3 times annual gross salary depending on the 
size of the Financial Advisor’s client base and their historical 
performance.  Each Financial Advisor is set objectives at the 
beginning of the year including a 100% pass in all compliance 
requirements.  Where indemnified commission is paid and the 
underlying client policy lapses and the commission is clawed 
back then this is reviewed by an Executive Director in order to 
monitor  trends  and  is  then  clawed  back  from  the  relevant 
Financial Advisor. 

Page | 25  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT 

Where 
the  Group  operates  contractually  guaranteed 
performance related pay, the contractual conditions must be 
approved by the REMCO.  

Executive Directors’ contractual terms 
In keeping with current recommended practice, the standard 
term  for  Executive  Director  appointments,  which  have  a 
contractual notice period, is 6 months.  

Non-executive Directors’ remuneration 
Non-executive Directors do not receive any benefits other than 
their  fees  and  travelling  expenses  for  which  they  are 
reimbursed.  The  level  of  fees  payable  to  Non-executive 
Directors  is  assessed  using  benchmarks  from  a  group  of 
comparable financial organisations.  

Directors’ emoluments 

Remuneration/  
Fees 
£ 

Performance 
Related Pay 
£ 

Executives 
Jim Mellon 
Denham Eke 
Douglas Grant 
James Smeed* 

Non-executives 
Gregory Bailey 
Alan Clarke 
David Gibson 
Gregory Jones * 
John Spellman 

Aggregate 
emoluments 

50,000 
50,000 
217,162 
123,174 
440,336 

- 
45,000 
85,000 
5,949 
40,000 
175,949 

- 
- 
42,500 
8,500 
51,000 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

The procedure for determining Director remuneration 
The  REMCO,  comprising  two  Non-executive  Directors,  is 
responsible  for  setting  the  remuneration  of  the  Executive 
Directors. Committee members do not take part in discussions 
concerning their own remuneration. The basic Non-executive 
Director  fee  is  set  by  the  Group  Chairman  and  CEO.  The 
Chairman  of  the  Committee  reports  at  the  Board  meeting 
following a Committee meeting. 

Implementation report 
It  is  the  view  of  the  Committee  that  Directors’  remuneration 
awarded  across  the  Group  for  the  year  has  been  in 
accordance with the Group’s stated Remuneration Policy and, 
on behalf of the Committee I recommend that you endorse this 
Group  report.    An  analysis  of  Directors’  emoluments  is  as 
follows: 

Pension 
£ 

- 
- 
21,716 
12,317 
34,034 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

2021 
Total 
£ 

50,000 
50,000 
281,378 
143,992 
525,370 

- 
45,000 
85,000 
5,949 
40,000 
175,949 

2020 
Total 
£ 

43,750 
43,750 
282,428 
- 
369,928 

- 
45,000 
85,000 
- 
26,667 
162,917 

616,285 

51,000 

34,034 

701,319 

532,845 

* James Smeed and Gregory Jones were appointed to the Board on 3 November 2021. 

Approval 
This report was approved by the Board of Directors on 9 March 2022 and signed on its behalf by:   

Alan Clarke 
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee 
9 March 2022 

Page | 26  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS’ REPORT 

The  Directors  present  their  annual  report  and  the  audited 
financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2021. 

Directors and Directors’ share interests 
Details of current Directors are set out on pages 19 to 20. 

Principal regulated activities 
The principal activities of the Group are the provision of asset 
and  personal  finance,  investing  activities,  foreign  exchange 
brokerage services and wealth management. 

The Bank, a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company, holds a 
Class 1(1) deposit taking licence issued under Part 2 of the Isle 
of  Man  Financial  Services  Act  2008.  Deposits  made  with  the 
Bank are covered by the Isle of Man Depositors’ Compensation 
Scheme contained in the Banking Business (Compensation of 
Depositors) Regulations 1991.  

CFL is authorised by the FCA to conduct brokerage services. 

EAL is authorised by the FSA under section 7 of the Financial 
Services Act 2008 to conduct investment business as a Class 
2, sub-classes (3), (6) and (7) licence holder.  

Results and dividends 
The Group profit before tax for the year was £3,043,000 (2020: 
£2,021,000). 

On 7 July 2021, a Dividend was declared for £196,800 which 
could  either  be  taken  up  in  cash  or  Shares.    161,562  new 
Shares were elected to be taken as Shares and were admitted 
to the Alternative Investment Market (“AIM”) for 7.0575 pence 
per Share, being a total cost of £11,402, on 10 August 2021.  

The proposed transfers to and from reserves are as set out in 
the Statement of Changes in Equity on page 41.  

Going Concern 
The Group has recognised a profit for the year after taxation of 
£2,853,000  (2020:  £1,968,000).  As  at  the  year  ended  31 
December  2021,  the  Bank  had  a  total  capital  ratio  of  19.1% 
(2020:  19.1%)  which  exceeded  the  regulatory  minimum 
requirement of 14.0% (2020: 15.0%). Based on these factors, 
management has a reasonable expectation that the Group has 
and  will  have  adequate  resources  to  continue  in  operational 
existence for the foreseeable future. 

Accordingly, the Directors continue to adopt the going concern 
basis in preparing the financial statements. 

Share capital 
Particulars  of  the  authorised  and  issued  share  capital  of  the 
Company are set out in note 28 to the financial statements.  

Significant shareholdings 
The number of shares held and the percentage of the issued 
shares which that number represented as at 02 February 2022 
are: 

The number of shares held by the current Directors is as follows:  

Jim Mellon2 
Gregory Bailey3 
David Gibson4 
Douglas Grant 
Alan Clarke 

Number 
02/02/22 
21,522,650 
17,835,750 
1,721,433 
518,177 
53,422 

Number 
31/12/21 
21,522,650 
17,835,750 
1,721,433 
518,177 
53,422 

Number 
31/12/20 
21,492,232 
17,835,750 
1,721,433 
505,821 
52,149 

1  Lynchwood  Nominees  Limited  holds  17,039,623  Ordinary 

Shares in trust for Aeternitas Imperium Privatstiftung. 

2  Burnbrae Limited holds 19,194,668 Ordinary Shares. Burnbrae 
Limited  is  100%  beneficially  owned  by  Jim  Mellon.  Denham 
Eke,  Executive  Vice-Chairman  of  MFG  is  also  a  director  of 
Burnbrae  Limited.  Vidacos  Nominees  Limited  also  holds 
2,327,982 Ordinary Shares in trust for Jim Mellon. 

3  Vidacos  Nominees  Limited holds 17,835,750  Ordinary  Shares 

in trust for Gregory Bailey. 

4  Comprises  1,721,433  Ordinary  Shares  held  by  Interactive 

Investor Services Limited for the benefit of David Gibson. 

The number of share options held by the current Directors is as 
follows:  

Douglas Grant* 

Number 
02/02/22 
700,000 

Number 
31/12/21 
700,000 

Number 
31/12/20 
700,000 

Directors’ liability insurance 
The  Group  maintains  insurance  cover  for  Directors’  potential 
liability. 

Fixed and intangible assets 
The movement in fixed and intangible assets during the year are 
set  out  in  notes  22  and  23  respectively  to  the  financial 
statements.  

Staff 
At 31 December 2021, there were 132 members of staff (2020: 
120), of whom 12 were part-time (2020: 11). 

Investment in subsidiaries 
Investments  in  the  Company’s  subsidiaries  are  disclosed  in 
note 30 to the financial statements.  

Auditor 
KPMG Audit LLC, being eligible, has expressed its willingness 
to continue in office.  

Number 

% of 
issued capital 

On behalf of the Board 

Lynchwood Nominees Limited1 
Jim Mellon2 
Gregory Bailey3 
Island Farms Limited 
Rock (Nominees) Limited 
Rulegale Nominees Limited 
Chase Nominees Limited 

23,353,583 
21,522,650 
17,835,750 
4,222,319 
4,198,917 
4,163,923 
3,935,612 

20.43 
18.83 
15.61 
3.69 
3.67 
3.67 
3.44 

J Mellon 
Executive Chairman 
9 March 2022 

Page | 27  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONTENTS 

  Page 

  Page 

Assurance 
Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities 
Independent Auditor’s Report 

Consolidated and company financial statements 
Consolidated Statement of Profit or Loss and Other 
Comprehensive Income 
Company  Statement  of  Profit  or  Loss  and  Other 
Comprehensive Income 
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position 
Company Statement of Financial Position 
Consolidated and Company Statement of Changes 
in Equity 
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows 
Company Statement of Cash Flows 

29 
30 

36 

38 

39 
40 
41 

42 
43 

  Notes to the consolidated and company financial statements 
  Basis of preparation 

1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 

Reporting entity 
Basis of accounting 
Functional and presentation currency 
Use of judgements and estimates 

Financial risk review and fair value 
5.       Financial instruments – Classification 
6. 
7. 

Financial instruments – Fair values 
Financial risk review 

Operating segments 
Net interest income 
Net fee and commission income  
Personnel expenses 

Performance for the year 
8. 
9. 
10. 
11. 
12.  Other expenses 
Impairment  on 
13. 
customers 

loans  and  advances 

to 

14.  Profit before tax payable 
15. 
Income tax expense 
16.  Earnings per share 

  Assets 

17.  Cash and cash equivalents  
18.  Debt securities 
19.  Financial assets 
20.  Loans and advances to customers 
21.  Trade and other receivables 
22.  Property,  plant  and  equipment  and  right-of-

use assets 
Intangible assets 

23. 

Liabilities and equity 
24.  Deposits from customers 
25.  Creditors and accrued charges 
26.  Loan notes 
27.  Pension liability 
28.  Called up share capital 

  Group composition 

29.  List of associates 
30.  List of subsidiaries 
31.  Acquisition of subsidiary 
32.  Acquisition of non-controlling interest 
33 
34.  Goodwill 
35. 

Investment in Group undertakings 

Acquisition of financial instrument 

  Other information 

36.  Related parties transactions 
37.  Leases 
38.  Regulators 
39.  Contingent liabilities 
40.  Subsequent events 
41.  Financial risk management 

  Accounting policies 

42.  Basis of measurement 
43.  Significant accounting policies 

44 
44 
44 
44 

44 
45 
47 

53 
54 
54 
55 
55 
55 

55 
56 
56 

57 
57 
58 
58 
59 
60 

61 

61 
61 
61 
62 
64 

65 
66 
66 
68 
68 
68 
69 

69 
70 
71 
71 
71 
72 

74 
75 

Page | 28  

 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES 

responsible 

The  Directors  are 
for  keeping  adequate 
accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the 
Parent Company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable 
accuracy  at  any  time  the  financial  position  of  the  Parent 
Company  and  enable  them  to  ensure  that  its  financial 
statements comply with the Isle of Man Companies Act 2006.   

They  are  responsible  for  such  internal  control  as  they 
determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial 
statements that are free from material misstatement, whether 
due to fraud or error, and have general responsibility for taking 
such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the 
assets of the Group and to prevent and detect fraud and other 
irregularities.   

The  Directors  are  responsible  for  the  maintenance  and 
integrity of the corporate and financial information included on 
the  Company’s  website.    Legislation  in  the  Isle  of  Man 
governing  the  preparation  and  dissemination  of  financial 
statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. 

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report 
and  the  Group  and  Parent  Company  financial  statements  in 
accordance with applicable law and regulations.   

The  Directors  are  required  to  prepare  Group  and  Parent 
Company  financial  statements  for  each  financial  year.  As 
required by the AIM Rules of the London Stock Exchange they 
are  required  to  prepare  the  Group  financial  statements  in 
accordance  with 
in 
accordance  with  UK-adopted 
international  accounting 
standards (“UK-adopted IFRS” or “IFRSs”) as applicable to an 
Isle of Man Company and applicable law and have elected to 
prepare  the  Parent  Company  financial  statements  on  the 
same basis. 

international  accounting  standards 

The  Directors  must  not  approve  the  financial  statements 
unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of 
the state of affairs of the Group and Parent Company and of 
their  profit  or  loss  for  that  period.    In  preparing  each  of  the 
Group  and  Parent  Company 
the 
Directors are required to:  

financial  statements, 

 

select  suitable  accounting policies and  then apply  them 
consistently;   

  make  judgements  and  estimates  that  are  reasonable, 

relevant and reliable;   

 

 

 

state  whether  they  have  been  prepared  in  accordance 
with IFRSs;   

assess  the  Group  and  Parent  Company’s  ability  to 
continue  as  a  going  concern,  disclosing,  as  applicable, 
matters related to going concern; and   

use  the  going  concern  basis  of  accounting  unless  they 
either  intend  to  liquidate  the  Group  or  the  Parent 
Company  or  to  cease  operations  or  have  no  realistic 
alternative but to do so.   

Page | 29  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

Our opinion is unmodified 
We have audited the consolidated financial statements of Manx Financial Group PLC (the “Company”) and its subsidiaries (together, 
the "Group"), for the year ended 31 December 2021 which comprise the Consolidated and Parent Company Statements of Profit or Loss 
and  Other  Comprehensive  Income,  the  Consolidated  and  Parent  Company  Statements  of  Financial  Position,  the  Consolidated  and 
Parent  Company  Statements of  Cash  Flows  and  the  Consolidated  and  Parent  Company Statements  of  Changes  in  Equity,  and  the 
related notes, including the accounting policies in note 43. 

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated financial statements: 

 

 
 

give a true and fair view of the state of the Group's and of the Company's affairs as at 31 December 2021 and of the Group's 
and of the Company's profit for the year then ended; 
have been properly prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards; and 
have been properly prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Isle of Man Companies Act 2006. 

Basis for opinion 
We  conducted  our  audit  in  accordance  with  International  Standards  on  Auditing  (UK)  (“ISAs  (UK)”)  and  applicable  law.  Our 
responsibilities are described below. We have fulfilled our ethical responsibilities under, and are independent of the Company and Group 
in accordance with, UK ethical requirements including the FRC Ethical Standard as applied to listed entities. We believe that the audit 
evidence we have obtained is a sufficient and appropriate basis for our opinion. 

Key audit matters: our assessment of the risks of material misstatement 
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in the audit of the consolidated financial 
statements  and  include  the  most  significant  assessed  risks  of  material  misstatement  (whether  or  not  due  to  fraud)  identified  by  us, 
including those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the 
efforts of the engagement team. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the consolidated financial statements as a 
whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.  In arriving at our audit opinion 
above, the key audit matters were as follows. (These are unchanged from 2020). 

and 

advances 

Key audit matter 
Loan 
customers – wholesale funding 
Loans 
to 
customers  £33,587,000  (2020: 
£32,509,000) 

advances 

and 

to 

Impairment Provision £nil (2020: 
£1,226,000) 

Expense  for  the  year  £365,000 
(2020: £508,000) 

Refer  to  the  Audit,  Risk  and 
Compliance 
Committee 
(“ARCC”) Report, note 4 (Use of 
Judgements  and  Estimates  - 
Assumptions  and  Estimation 
Uncertainties), note 7(A) (Credit 
Risk),  note  13  (Impairment  on 
Loans 
to 
Customers), note 20 (Loans and 
Advances  to  Customers),  note 
Risk 
41 
Management  –  Credit  risk)  and 
(Accounting 
note 
Policy 
of 
for 
Financial Instruments). 

and  Advances 

Impairment 

(Financial 

43(G)(vii) 

(B) 

to  calculate 

The risk    
Subjective estimate 
The  entity  is  required  by  the  financial  reporting 
framework 
the 
expected credit loss model. Impairment is measured 
on an instrument by instrument basis except where 
instruments  are  grouped,  for  impairment  to  be 
measured on a collective basis under the expected 
credit loss model.  

impairment  using 

Wholesale  Funding  comprises  Block  Finance, 
Wholesale Funding Agreements and Stocking Plans. 
These  books  comprise  individually  significant  loan 
balances and are in the nature of a secured business 
loan. The security is principally an underlying pool of 
loans. 

Loan impairment provisions reflect estimates of the 
amount and timing of future recoveries which require 
an assessment of matters such as future economic 
conditions and the value of collateral. Estimates, by 
their  nature,  give  rise  to  a  higher  risk  of  material 
misstatement due to error or fraud. 

The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk 
assessment,  we  determined  that  the  impairment 
provision  has  a  high  degree  of  estimation 
uncertainty, including increased uncertainty from the 
impact of COVID19 on the economy with a potential 
range  of  reasonable  outcomes  greater  than  our 
materiality  for  the  financial  statements  as  a  whole, 
and possibly many times that amount. 

Our response 
Our audit procedures included: 

Internal Controls: 
Understanding  the  design  and  implementation  of 
controls  in  respect  of  the  origination  of  wholesale 
funding loans, including borrower due diligence. 

Understanding  the  design  and  implementation  of 
controls  in  respect  of  the  Group’s  loan  impairment 
process such as the timely recognition of impairment 
provisions, 
the  completeness  and  accuracy  of 
reports  used  in  the  loan  impairment  process  and 
management review processes over the calculation 
of collective and specific provisions. 

Test of details: 
We  agreed  the  specific  provisions  included  in  the 
to  Group’s  provisioning 
financial  statements 
schedule  and  vouched  that  this  schedule  was 
correctly  extracted  from  the  loans  and  advances 
system, including the arrears information. 

We  tested  all  specific  provisions.  This  included 
challenging  Group’s  assessment  of  the  specific 
provision, taking account of such factors as: amount 
of arrears; compliance with covenant requirements, 
financial  standing  of  the  business  –  by  inspecting 
latest  available  accounts  and  status  of  underlying 
security  –  by 
inspecting  a  sample  of  security 
documentation. 

Historical comparison: 
in  collective 
the 
We  challenged 
impairment  models  by  comparison  to  default  and 
recovery experience across each of the loan finance 
categories. 

inputs  used 

Page | 30  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

Key audit matter 

The risk    

and 

advances 

Loan 
to 
customers  –  individual  finance 
agreements 
to 
Loans 
customers £195,250,000 (2020: 
£160,634,000) 

advances 

and 

Impairment 
Provision 
£7,562,000 (2020: £5,895,000)  

Expense for the year £4,012,000 
(2020: £5,144,000)  

Refer to the ARCC Report, note 
4  (Use  of  Judgements  and 
Estimates  -  Assumptions  and 
Estimation  Uncertainties),  note 
7(A)  (Credit  Risk),  note  13 
(Impairment  on  Loans  and 
Advances  to  Customers),  note 
20  (Loans  and  Advances  to 
Customers), 
(B) 
(Financial  Risk  Management  – 
Credit  risk)  and  note  43(G)(vii) 
for 
(Accounting 
Impairment 
Financial 
Instruments). 

Policy 

note 

41 

of 

to  calculate 

Subjective estimate 
The  entity  is  required  by  the  financial  reporting 
framework 
the 
expected credit loss model. Impairment is measured 
on an instrument by instrument basis except where 
instruments  are  grouped,  for  impairment  to  be 
measured on a collective basis under the expected 
credit loss model.  

impairment  using 

Individual finance agreements include hire purchase 
finance  leases  and  unsecured  loans  to  individuals 
and companies. Any security is typically the specific 
assets financed. 

Loan impairment provisions reflect estimates of the 
amount and timing of future recoveries which require 
an assessment of matters such as future economic 
conditions and the value of collateral. Estimates, by 
their  nature,  give  rise  to  a  higher  risk  of  material 
misstatement due to error or fraud. 

The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk 
assessment,  we  determined  that  the  impairment 
provision  has  a  high  degree  of  estimation 
uncertainty, including increased uncertainty from the 
impact of COVID19 on the economy with a potential 
range  of  reasonable  outcomes  greater  than  our 
materiality  for  the  financial  statements  as  a  whole, 
and possibly many times that amount. 

Impairment  of  goodwill  and 
intangible assets   

Goodwill  
£6,049,000 (2020: £4,412,000)  
and Intangibles Assets p 
£2,321,000 (2020: 2,286,000).  

Refer to the ARCC Report, note 
4  (Use  of  Judgements  and 
Estimates  -  Assumptions  and 

Forecast based valuation 
Goodwill  and  intangible  assets  are  significant  and 
the estimated recoverable amount of these balances 
is subjective due to the inherent uncertainty involved 
in forecasting and discounting future cash flows for 
the  goodwill  impairment  test  and  in  performing  a 
review  for  indicators  of  impairment  for  intangible 
assets. 

Goodwill  and  intangible  assets  have  arisen  on  the 
Group’s acquisition of businesses including lenders, 

Our response 
Assessing disclosures: 
Assessing the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures 
about the degree of estimation uncertainty involved 
at  arriving  at  the  provisions  in  accordance  with  the 
relevant  financial  reporting  framework  and  specific 
circumstances of the Group. 
Our audit procedures included: 

Internal Controls: 
Understanding  the  design  and  implementation  of 
controls  in  respect  of  the  origination  of  individual 
finance loans, including borrower due diligence. 

Understanding  the  design  and  implementation  of 
controls  in  respect  of  the  Group’s  loan  impairment 
process such as the timely recognition of impairment 
provisions, 
the  completeness  and  accuracy  of 
reports  used  in  the  loan  impairment  process  and 
management review processes over the calculation 
of collective and specific provisions. 

Use of KPMG Specialists: 
We  involved  KPMG  specialists  to  examine  the 
methodology  of  the  Group’s  expected  credit  loss 
model  and  its  compliance  with  the  requirements  of 
accounting standards. 

Test of details: 
We  agreed  the  specific  provisions  included  in  the 
financial  statements  to  management’s  provisioning 
schedule  and  vouched  that  this  schedule  was 
correctly  extracted  from  the  loans  and  advances 
system, including the arrears information. 

those  against 
loans.  This 

We tested a sample of specific provisions, weighted 
individually  significant 
towards 
impaired 
challenging 
included 
management’s assessment of the specific provision, 
taking  into  account  such  factors  as:  the  number  of 
repayments  in  arrears;  the  known  whereabouts  of 
the hirer/lessee and of the assets under finance; and 
the  amounts  received  under  agreed  repayment 
plans,  where  scheduled  repayments  under  the 
original agreement are no longer being met. 

Historical comparison: 
We  challenged 
in  collective 
the 
impairment  models  and  considered  whether  those 
inputs  reflected  default  and  recovery  experience 
across each of the loan finance categories. 

inputs  used 

Assessing disclosures: 
Assessing the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures 
about the degree of estimation uncertainty involved 
at arriving at the provisions. 
Our audit procedures included: 

Internal Controls: 
Understanding the controls in respect of the Group’s 
goodwill  and  intangibles  assets  impairment  review 
process such as the timely recognition of impairment 
provisions  and  the  completeness  and  accuracy  of 
reports used in the impairment review process. 

Page | 31  

 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

in 

Key audit matter 
Estimation  Uncertainties),  note 
23  (Intangible  Assets),  note  33 
(Investment 
Group 
Undertakings),  43(A)  (Basis  for 
Consolidation  of  Subsidiaries 
Financial 
and 
the  Parent 
Statements  of 
Company), 
43(K) 
(Intangible Assets and Goodwill) 
and  note  43(L)  (Impairment  of 
Non-Financial Assets) 

Separate 

note 

of 

Recoverability 
Parent 
Company’s  subordinated  loans 
to 
in 
subsidiaries 

investment 

and 

in 

Investment 
£22,597,000 
£22,597,000)  and 
amounts  due 
undertakings 
(2020: £9,663,000).  

subsidiaries 
(2020: 
loans  and 
from  Group 
£13,832,000 

(Investment 

Refer to  the  ARCC  report,  note 
in  Group 
35 
Undertakings) 
note 
and 
(Separate  Financial 
43(A)(vi) 
Statements of the Company). 

The risk    
independent financial advisers and finance brokers, 
each of which is identified by the Group as a Cash 
Generating Unit. 

uncertainty, 

The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk 
assessment, we determined that the value in use of 
the  Cash  Generating  Units  containing  goodwill 
and/or  intangible  assets  has  a  high  degree  of 
estimation 
increased 
uncertainty  from  the  impact  of  COVID19  on  the 
economy  with  a  potential  range  of  reasonable 
outcomes  greater 
the 
financial  statements  as  a  whole.  The  financial 
statements 
the  sensitivity 
estimated by the Group.  

than  our  materiality  for 

(note  34)  disclose 

including 

Low risk, high value  
The  carrying  value  of 
the  Parent  Company’s 
investment  in  subsidiaries  and  loans  and  amounts 
due from Group undertakings represents 97% (2020: 
94%)  of  the  Parent  Company’s  total  assets.  The 
assessment of carrying value is not at a high risk of 
significant  misstatement  or  subject  to  significant 
judgement as the carrying value is supported by the 
audited net asset value of the subsidiaries. However, 
due  to  its  materiality  in  the  context  of  the  Parent 
Company financial statements, this is considered to 
be the area that had the greatest effect on our overall 
Parent Company audit. 

Our response 
Evaluating experts engaged by management: 
We have evaluated the competence, capabilities and 
objectivity of the management’s expert; obtained an 
understanding  of  the  work  of  that  expert  and 
evaluated the appropriateness of that expert’s work 
as audit evidence for the valuation of goodwill. 

Use of KPMG Specialists: 
We involved our own valuation specialists who have 
in 
tested  reasonableness  of 
particular  those  relating  to  each  cash  generating 
unit’s forecast revenue growth, profit margins and the 
valuation method used. 

the  assumptions 

Benchmarking assumptions:  
Comparing  the  Group’s  assumptions  to  externally 
derived  data  in  relation  to  key  inputs  such  as 
projected  economic  growth,  competition,  cost 
inflation and discount rates 

Indictors of impairment for intangible assets: 
Analysing  latest  financial  data  for  the  business 
related  to  the  relevant  intangible  asset  to  assess 
whether there are any indicators of impairment, such 
as losses being made or a downturn in sales. 

Sensitivity analysis:  
Performing  headroom  analysis  on  the  assumptions 
noted above. 

Assessing disclosures: 
Assessing the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures 
about 
the 
the  sensitivity  of 
impairment  assessment 
in  key 
assumptions  reflected  in  the  risks  inherent  in  the 
valuation of goodwill and intangible assets. 
Our audit procedures included: 

the  outcome  of 
to  changes 

the 

relevant 

Test of details: 
Comparing  the  carrying  amount  of  100%  of  the 
Parent  Company’s  investments  in  subsidiaries  and 
loans  and  amounts  due  from  Group  undertakings 
with 
subsidiaries’  and  Group 
undertaking’s  statement  of  financial  position  to 
identify whether their financial position supported the 
the  Parent  Company’s 
carrying  amount  of 
investments  in  those  subsidiaries  and  loans  and 
amounts  due  from  Group  undertakings,  assessing 
whether those subsidiaries and Group undertakings 
have  historically  been  profit-making  and  evaluating 
budgeted forecasts in line with our knowledge of the 
respective  subsidiaries  and  the  current  economic 
conditions in  which those subsidiaries operate. 

Our application of materiality and an overview of the scope of our audit 
Materiality for the consolidated financial statements as a whole was set at £120,000 (2020: £82,000), determined with reference to a 
benchmark of Group profit before tax (forecasted) of £2,400,000, of which it represents approximately 5% (2020: 4%). 

Page | 32  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

Our application of materiality and an overview of the scope of our audit (continued) 
Materiality for the Parent Company financial statements as a whole was set at £120,000 (2020: £82,000), determined with reference to 
a benchmark of Parent Company total assets, but reduced to align with materiality for the Group financial statements. 

In line with our audit methodology, our procedures on individual account balances and disclosures were performed to a lower threshold, 
performance materiality, so as to reduce to an acceptable level the risk that individually immaterial misstatements in individual account 
balances add up to a material amount across the financial statements as a whole. Performance materiality for the Group was set at 75% 
(2020: 75%) of materiality for the financial statements as a whole, which equates to £90,000 (2020: £61,000). We applied this percentage 
in our determination of performance materiality because we did not identify any factors indicating an elevated level of risk. 

We reported to the Audit, Risk and Compliance Committee any corrected or uncorrected identified misstatements exceeding £6,000 
(2020: £,4,000), in addition to other identified misstatements that warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. Our audit of the Group was 
undertaken to the materiality level specified above, which has informed our identification of significant risks of material misstatement 
and the associated audit procedures performed in those areas as detailed above.  

The Group audit team audits all components of the group except Ninkasi Rentals & Finance Limited (formerly Beer Swaps Limited) 
(“NRFL”) which represents 2% of the Group’s total assets. Group reporting is received for NRFL, subject to a materiality level set by the 
Group audit team. 

Detailed audit instructions were sent to the auditor of NRFL. These instructions covered the significant audit areas that should be covered 
by  this  audit  (which  included  the  relevant  risks  of  material  misstatement  detailed  above)  and  set  out  the  information  required  to  be 
reported back to the group audit team. 

Going concern 
The Directors have prepared the consolidated financial statements on the going concern basis as they do not intend to liquidate the 
Group or the Company or to cease their operations, and as they have concluded that the Group and the Company's financial position 
means that this is realistic. They have also concluded that there are no material uncertainties that could have cast significant doubt over 
their ability to continue as a going concern for at least a year from the date of approval of the consolidated financial statements (the 
“going concern period"). 

In our evaluation of the Directors' conclusions, we considered the inherent risks to the Group and the Company's business model and 
analysed how those risks might affect the Group and the Company's financial resources or ability to continue operations over the going 
concern period. The risk that we considered most likely to affect the Group and the Company's financial resources or ability to continue 
operations  over  this  period  was  the  recoverability  of  financial  assets  subject  to  credit  risk  as  a  result  of  economic  downturn  due  to 
outbreak of COVID19. 

We  considered  whether  this  risk  could  plausibly  affect  the  liquidity  in  the  going  concern  period  by  comparing  severe,  but  plausible 
downside scenarios that could arise from this risk against the level of available financial resources indicated by the Company’s financial 
forecasts. 

We  considered  whether  the  going  concern  disclosure  in  the  Directors’  Report  gives  a  full  and  accurate  description of  the  Directors' 
assessment of going concern. 

Our conclusions based on this work: 

  we consider that the Directors' use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the consolidated financial 

statements is appropriate; 

  we have not identified, and concur with the Directors' assessment that there is not, a material uncertainty related to events or 
conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the Group and the Company's ability to continue as a 
going concern for the going concern period; and 

  we found the going concern disclosure in the notes to the consolidated financial statements to be acceptable. 

However, as we cannot predict all future events or conditions and as subsequent events may result in outcomes that are inconsistent 
with judgements that were reasonable at the time they were made, the above conclusions are not a guarantee that the Group and the 
Company will continue in operation. 

Fraud and breaches of laws and regulations – ability to detect 
Identifying and responding to risks of material misstatement due to fraud 
To identify risks of material misstatement due to fraud (“fraud risks”) we assessed events or conditions that could indicate an incentive 
or pressure to commit fraud or provide an opportunity to commit fraud. Our risk assessment procedures included: 

 

 
 

enquiring of management as to the Group’s policies and procedures to prevent and detect fraud as well as enquiring whether 
management have knowledge of any actual, suspected or alleged fraud; 
reading minutes of meetings of those charged with governance; and 
using analytical procedures to identify any unusual or unexpected relationships. 

Page | 33  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

Fraud and breaches of laws and regulations – ability to detect (continued) 
As required by auditing standards, we perform procedures to address the risk of management override of controls, in particular the risk 
that management may be in a position to make inappropriate accounting entries. On this audit we do not believe there is a fraud risk 
related to revenue recognition because the Group’s revenue streams are simple in nature with respect to accounting policy choice, and 
are easily verifiable to external data sources or agreements with little or no requirement for estimation from management. We did not 
identify any additional fraud risks. 

We performed procedures including: 

 

 

identifying journal entries and other adjustments to test based on risk criteria and comparing any identified entries to supporting 
documentation; and 
incorporating an element of unpredictability in our audit procedures. 

Identifying and responding to risks of material misstatement due to non-compliance with laws and regulations 
We identified areas of laws and regulations that could reasonably be expected to have a material effect on the consolidated financial 
statements  from  our  sector  experience  and  through  discussion  with  management  (as  required  by  auditing  standards),  and  from 
inspection of the Group’s regulatory and legal correspondence, if any, and discussed with management the policies and procedures 
regarding compliance with laws and regulations. As the Group is regulated, our assessment of risks involved gaining an understanding 
of the control environment including the entity’s procedures for complying with regulatory requirements. 

The  Group  is  subject  to  laws  and  regulations  that  directly  affect  the  consolidated  financial  statements  including  financial  reporting 
legislation and taxation legislation and we assessed the extent of compliance with these laws and regulations as part of our procedures 
on the related financial statement items. 

The Group is subject to other laws and regulations where the consequences of non-compliance could have a material effect on amounts 
or disclosures in the consolidated financial statements, for instance through the imposition of fines or litigation or impacts on the Group 
and the Company’s ability to operate. We identified financial services regulation as being the area most likely to have such an effect, 
recognising the regulated nature of the Group’s activities and its legal form. Auditing standards limit the required audit procedures to 
identify  non-compliance  with  these  laws  and  regulations  to  enquiry  of  management  and  inspection  of  regulatory  and  legal 
correspondence, if any. Therefore, if a breach of operational regulations is not disclosed to us or evident from relevant correspondence, 
an audit will not detect that breach. 

Context of the ability of the audit to detect fraud or breaches of law or regulation 
Owing to the inherent limitations of an audit, there is an unavoidable risk that we may not have detected some material misstatements 
in the consolidated financial statements, even though we have properly planned and performed our audit in accordance with auditing 
standards. For example, the further removed non-compliance with laws and regulations is from the events and transactions reflected in 
the consolidated financial statements, the less likely the inherently limited procedures required by auditing standards would identify it.  

In addition, as with any audit, there remains a higher risk of non-detection of fraud, as this may involve collusion, forgery, intentional 
omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of internal controls. Our audit procedures are designed to detect material misstatement. 
We are not  responsible for preventing non-compliance or fraud and cannot be expected to detect non-compliance with all laws and 
regulations. 

Other information 
The Directors are responsible for the other information. The other information comprises the information included in the annual report 
but does not include the consolidated financial statements and our auditor's report thereon. Our opinion on the consolidated financial 
statements does not cover the other information and we do not express an audit opinion or any form of assurance conclusion thereon. 

In connection with our audit of the consolidated financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, 
consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the consolidated financial statements or our knowledge obtained 
in the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated.  If, based on the work we have performed,  we conclude that there is a 
material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact. We have nothing to report in this regard. 

Respective responsibilities 
Directors' responsibilities 
As  explained more fully in their statement  set out  on page 29, the Directors are responsible for: the preparation of  the consolidated 
financial statements including being satisfied that they give a true and fair view; such internal control as they determine is necessary to 
enable  the  preparation  of  consolidated financial statements  that  are  free from material  misstatement,  whether due  to  fraud or error; 
assessing the Group and Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern; 
and using the going concern basis of accounting unless they either intend to liquidate the Group or the Company or to cease operations, 
or have no realistic alternative but to do so.  

Page | 34  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

Respective responsibilities (continued) 
Auditor's responsibilities 
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements as a whole are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue our opinion in an auditor’s report. Reasonable assurance is a high level of 
assurance but does not guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement 
when  it  exists.  Misstatements  can  arise  from  fraud  or  error  and  are  considered  material  if,  individually  or  in  aggregate,  they  could 
reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of the consolidated financial statements.  

A fuller description of our responsibilities is provided on the FRC’s website at www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. 

The purpose of this report and restrictions on its use by persons other than the Company's members, as a body 
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with section 80(C) of the Companies Act 2006. Our 
audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an 
auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone 
other than the Company and the Company’s members, as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed. 

KPMG Audit LLC 
Chartered Accountants 
Heritage Court 
41 Athol Street 
Douglas 
Isle of Man  
IM1 1LA    

9 March 2022 

Page | 35  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONSOLIDATED  STATEMENT  OF  PROFIT  OR  LOSS  AND  OTHER 
COMPREHENSIVE INCOME 

For the year ended 31 December  

Interest income 
Interest expense 

Net interest income 

Fee and commission income 
Fee and commission expense 
Depreciation on leasing assets 

Net trading income 

Other operating income 
Gain on financial instruments 
Realised (loss) / gain on debt securities 
Revaluation on acquisition of subsidiary 

Operating income 

Personnel expenses  
Other expenses 
Impairment on loans and advances to customers 
Depreciation 
Amortisation and impairment of intangibles 
Share of profit of equity accounted investees, net of tax 
VAT recovery 

Profit before tax payable 

Income tax expense 

Profit for the year  

Notes 

9 

10 
10 
22 

19 
18 
31(F) 

11 
12 
13  
22 
23 
29 
21 

14 

15 

2021 
£000 

22,947 
(4,967) 

2020 
£000 

20,692 
(5,222) 

17,980 

15,470 

4,621 
(3,339) 
(269) 

3,865 
(3,481) 
(406) 

18,993 

15,448 

365 
30 
(1) 
660 

200 
259 
261 
237 

20,047 

16,405 

(7,156) 
(4,500) 
(4,360) 
(675) 
(458) 
32 
113 

3,043 

(234) 

2,809 

(6,823) 
(3,707) 
(3,950) 
(490) 
(374) 
54 
906 

2,021 

(53) 

1,968 

Page | 36  

 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONSOLIDATED  STATEMENT  OF  PROFIT  OR  LOSS  AND  OTHER 
COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (CONTINUED) 

For the year ended 31 December  

Notes 

Profit for the year  

Other comprehensive income:  

Items that will be reclassified to profit or loss  
Unrealised loss on debt securities 
Revaluation gain on property, plant and equipment 
Recognition of deferred tax credit on defined benefit pension 

Items that will never be reclassified to profit or loss 
Actuarial gain / (loss) on defined benefit pension scheme taken to equity 

2021 
£000 

2,809 

2020 
£000 

1,968 

18 
22 

27 

(18) 
15 
67 

(51) 
- 
- 

172 

(241) 

Total comprehensive income for the period attributable to owners  

3,045 

1,676 

Profit attributable to: 
Owners of the Company 
Non-controlling interests 

Total comprehensive income attributable to: 
Owners of the Company 
Non-controlling interests 

Earnings per share – Profit for the year 
Basic earnings per share (pence) 
Diluted earnings per share (pence) 

Earnings per share – Total comprehensive income for the year 
Basic earnings per share (pence) 
Diluted earnings per share (pence) 

The notes on pages 44 to 86 form part of these financial statements.  

The Directors believe that all results derive from continuing activities. 

2,793 
16 
2,809 

3,029 
16 
3,045 

2.46 
1.97 

2.66 
2.13 

1,935 
33 
1,968 

1,643 
33 
1,676 

1.65 
1.37 

1.41 
1.19 

16 
16 

16 
16 

Page | 37  

 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

COMPANY STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE 
INCOME 

For the year ended 31 December  

Notes 

Dividend income 
Interest income 
Other income 

Operating income 

Personnel expenses 
Administration expenses 
Depreciation expense 
Amortisation expense 
Impairment of intercompany receivable 

Profit before tax payable 

Tax payable 

Profit for the year  

Total comprehensive income for the year 

The notes on pages 44 to 86 form part of these financial statements.  

The Directors believe that all results derive from continuing activities. 

14 

2021 
£000 

1,259 
518 
78 

1,855 

(129) 
(59) 
(91) 
(2) 
(545) 

1,029 

- 

1,029 

1,029 

2020 
£000 

572 
522 
- 

1,094 

(74) 
(122) 
(101) 
- 
- 

797 

- 

797 

797 

Page | 38  

 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION 

As at 31 December  

Assets 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Debt securities 
Financial asset 
Loans and advances to customers 
Trade and other receivables 
Property, plant and equipment 
Intangible assets 
Investment in associates 
Goodwill 

Total assets 

Liabilities 
Deposits from customers 
Creditors and accrued charges 
Contingent consideration 
Loan notes 
Pension liability 
Deferred tax liability 

Total liabilities 

Equity 
Called up share capital 
Profit and loss account 
Revaluation reserve 
Non-controlling interest 

Total equity 

Total liabilities and equity 

Notes 

2021 
£000 

2020 
£000 

17 
18 
33  
20 
21 
22 
23 
29 
34 

24 
25 
6(ii), 31 
26 
27 
15 

28 

22 

20,279 
40,987 
68 
229,251 
1,947 
7,257 
2,508 
136 
6,320 

34,053 
25,532 
4 
193,143 
2,170 
6,045 
2,286 
316 
4,412 

308,753 

267,961 

253,459 
4,745 
1,023 
23,672 
687 
182 

218,285 
3,206 
672 
22,222 
944 
197 

283,768 

245,526 

19,133 
5,781 
15 
56 

24,985 

19,121 
3,230 
- 
84 

22,435 

308,753 

267,961 

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 9 March 2022 and signed on its behalf by: 

Jim Mellon 
Executive Chairman 

Denham Eke 
Executive Vice-Chairman  Chief Executive Officer  

Douglas Grant 

The notes on pages 44 to 86 form part of these financial statements. 

Page | 39  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

COMPANY STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION 

As at 31 December  

Assets 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade and other receivables 
Amounts due from Group undertakings 
Property, plant and equipment 
Intangible assets 
Investment in subsidiaries 
Subordinated loans 

Total assets 

Liabilities 
Creditors and accrued charges 
Amounts due to Group undertakings 
Loan notes 

Total liabilities 

Equity 
Called up share capital 
Profit and loss account 

Total equity 

Total liabilities and equity 

The notes on pages 44 to 86 form part of these financial statements.  

Notes 

17 
21 
35 
22 

30 
35 

25 
35 
26 

28 

2021 
£000 

430 
472 
6,104 
263 
20 
22,597 
7,728 

37,614 

501 
3,309 
23,672 

27,482 

19,133 
(9,001) 

10,132 

37,614 

2020 
£000 

1,378 
309 
1,935 
354 
7 
22,597 
7,728 

34,308 

501 
2,297 
22,222 

25,020 

19,121 
(9,833) 

9,288 

34,308 

Page | 40  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 

Group 

Balance as at 1 January 2020 

Profit for the year  
Other comprehensive income 

Transactions with owners 
Changes in ownership interests 
Acquisition  of  subsidiary  with  non-
controlling interest 

Balance as at 31 December 2020 

Profit for the year 
Other comprehensive income 

Transactions with owners 
Dividend declared (see note 28) 
Acquisition  of  subsidiary  with  non-
controlling interest 

Attributable to owners of the Company 

Share 
capital 
£000 

20,732 

Profit 
and loss 
account 
£000 

1,587 

- 
- 

1,935 

(292) 

(1,611) 

- 

19,121 

- 
- 

12 
- 

- 

- 

3,230 

2,793 
221 

(197) 
(266) 

Revaluation 
reserve 
£000 

- 

- 
- 

- 

- 

- 

- 
15 

- 
- 

Non-
controlling 
interests 
£000 

- 

33 
- 

- 

51 

84 

16 
- 

Total  
equity 
£000 

22,319 

1,968 
(292) 

(1,611) 

51 

22,435 

2,809 
236 

- 
(44) 

(185) 
(310) 

Total 
£000 

22,319 

1,935 
(292) 

(1,611) 

- 

22,351 

2,793 
236 

(185) 
(266) 

Balance as at 31 December 2021 

19,133 

5,781 

15 

24,929 

56 

24,985 

Company 

Balance as at 1 January 2020 

Profit for the year 

Transactions with owners 
Changes in ownership interests 

Balance as at 31 December 2020 

Profit for the year 

Transactions with owners 
Dividend declared (see note 28) 

Balance as at 31 December 2021 

The notes on pages 44 to 86 form part of these financial statements. 

Share 
capital 
£000 

Profit and 
loss 
account 
£000 

Total  
equity 
£000 

20,732 

(10,630) 

10,102 

- 

797 

797 

(1,611) 

19,121 

- 

12 

19,133 

- 

(9,833) 

1,029 

(197) 

(9,001) 

(1,611) 

9,288 

1,029 

(185) 

10,132 

Page | 41  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS 

For the year ended 31 December 

RECONCILIATION OF PROFIT BEFORE TAXATION TO OPERATING CASH FLOWS 

Profit before tax 

Adjustments for: 
Depreciation 
Amortisation and impairment of intangibles 
Share of profit of equity accounted investees 
Contingent consideration interest expense 
Pension charge included in personnel expenses 
Gain on financial instruments 
Revaluation on acquisition of subsidiary 

Changes in: 
Financial asset 
Trade and other receivables 
Creditors and accrued charges 

Net cash flow from trading activities 

Changes in: 
Loans and advances to customers 
Deposits from customers 
Pension contribution 

Cash inflow / (outflow) from operating activities 

CASH FLOW STATEMENT 

Cash from operating activities 
Cash inflow / (outflow) from operating activities 
Income taxes paid 

Net cash inflow / (outflow) from operating activities 

Cash flows from investing activities 
Purchase of property, plant and equipment 
Purchase of intangible assets 
Sale of tangible fixed assets 
Acquisition of subsidiary or associate, net of cash acquired 
(Purchase) / sale of debt securities  
Contingent consideration 

Net cash (outflow) / inflow from investing activities 

Cash flows from financing activities 
Receipt of loan notes 
Payment of lease liabilities (capital) 
Dividend paid 

Net cash inflow from financing activities 

Net (decrease) / increase in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January  

Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 

Included in cash flows are:  
Interest received – cash amounts 
Interest paid – cash amounts 

The notes on pages 44 to 86 form part of these financial statements.  

Notes 

2021 
£000 

2020 
£000 

3,043 

2,021 

22 
23 
29 
6(ii) 
27 
19 
31 

27 

22 
23 
22 
31,32 
18 
6(ii),31 

26 
37 
28 

944 
458 
(32) 
114 
13 
(30) 
(660) 

3,850 

4 
223 
(109) 

3,968 

896 
374 
(54) 
122 
15 
(253) 
(237) 

2,884 

15 
415 
315 

3,629 

(36,128) 
35,174 
(98) 

2,916 

(16,023) 
8,352 
- 

(4,042) 

2,916 
(10) 

2,906 

(2,109) 
(481) 
961 
(555) 
(15,473) 
(120) 

(17,777) 

1,450 
(201) 
(152) 

1,097 

(13,774) 

34,053 

20,279 

22,624 
4,936 

(4,042) 
(172) 

(4,214) 

(1,187) 
(231) 
127 
(648) 
21,209 
(59) 

19,211 

4,640 
(204) 
- 

4,436 

19,433 

14,620 

34,053 

20,274 
(5,053) 

Page | 42  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

COMPANY STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS  

For the year ended 31 December 

RECONCILIATION OF PROFIT BEFORE TAXATION TO OPERATING CASH FLOWS 

Profit before tax 

Adjustments for: 
Depreciation 
Amortisation 
Dividend income 

Changes in: 
Amounts due from group undertakings 
Trade and other receivables 
Creditors and accrued charges 
Amounts due from Group undertakings 

Cash (outflow) / inflow from operating activities  

CASH FLOW STATEMENT 

Cash from operating activities 
Cash (outflow) / inflow from operating activities 
Income taxes paid 

Net cash (outflow) / inflow from operating activities 

Cash flows from investing activities 
Investment in subsidiaries 
Purchase of property, plant and equipment 
Purchase of intangible assets 

Net cash outflow from investing activities 

Cash flows from financing activities 
Receipt of loan notes 
Receipt of subordinated loan 
Payment of finance lease liability 
Dividend paid 

Net cash inflow from financing activities 

Net (decrease) / increase in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January  

Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 

The notes on pages 44 to 86 form part of these financial statements.  

Notes 

2021 
£000 

2020 
£000 

1,029 

797 

22 

30 

26 

91 
2 
(1,259) 

(137) 

(2,910) 
(163) 
66 
1,012 

(2,132) 

(2,132) 
- 

(2,132) 

- 
- 
(15) 

(15) 

1,450 
- 
(99) 
(152) 

1,199 

(948) 

1,378 

430 

101 
- 
(572) 

326 

(347) 
(78) 
17 
1,522 

1,440 

1,440 
- 

1,440 

(4,775) 
(5) 
- 

(4,780) 

4,640 
50 
(91) 
- 

4,599 

1,259 

119 

1,378 

Page | 43  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

1.  Reporting entity 
Manx Financial Group PLC (“Company”) is a company incorporated in the Isle of Man. The consolidated financial statements of the 
Company for the year ended 31 December 2021 comprise the Company and its subsidiaries (“Group”) including Conister Bank Limited 
(the “Bank”). The Group is primarily involved in the provision of financial services. 

2.  Basis of accounting 
The  consolidated  and  the  separate  financial  statements  of  the  Company  have  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  international 
accounting standards in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards (“UK-adopted IFRS” or “IFRSs”), on a going 
concern basis as disclosed in the Directors’ Report. 

3.  Functional and presentation currency 
These financial statements are presented in pounds sterling, which is the Group’s functional currency. All amounts have been rounded 
to the nearest thousand, unless otherwise indicated. All subsidiaries of the Group have pounds sterling as their functional currency.  

4.  Use of judgements and estimates 
The  preparation  of  financial  statements  requires  management  to  make  judgements,  estimates  and  assumptions  that  affect  the 
application of accounting policies and the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Actual results may differ from 
these estimates. 

The extent to which COVID-19 impacts the Group’s business will depend on the effectiveness of government containment actions 
and the effectiveness of government and central bank stimulus measures. As the economic environment remains uncertain, actual 
results may differ from the estimates below. 

Estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the 
period in which the estimate is revised and in any future periods affected.  

Assumptions and estimation uncertainties 
Information  about  assumptions  and  estimation  uncertainties  at  year-end  that  have  a  significant  risk  of  resulting  in  a  material 
adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities in the next financial year is included in the following notes: 

  Note 27 – measurement of defined benefit obligations: key actuarial assumptions; 
  Note 23 and 34 – impairment test of intangible assets and goodwill: key assumptions underlying recoverable amounts; 
  Note  43(G)(vii)  –  measurement  of  Expected  Credit  Loss  (“ECL”)  allowance  for  loans  and  advances  to  customers  and 
assessment of impairment allowances where loans are in default or arrears: key assumptions in determining the weighted-
average loss rate; and 

  Note 6 – measurement of contingent consideration. 

5.  Financial instruments - Classification 
For description of how the Group classifies financial assets and liabilities, see note 43(G)(ii). 

The  following  table  provides  reconciliation  between  line  items  in  the  statement  of  financial  position  and  categories  of  financial 
instruments. 

31 December 2021 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Debt securities 
Financial asset 
Loans and advances to customers 
Trade and other receivables 
Total financial assets 

Deposits from customers 
Creditor and accrued charges 
Contingent consideration 
Loan notes 

Total financial liabilities 

Mandatorily 
at FVTPL 
£000 

Designated 
as at FVTPL 
£000 

FVOCI – 
debt 
instruments 
£000 

FVOCI – 
equity 
instruments 
£000 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
68 
- 
- 
68 

- 
- 
1,023 
- 

1,023 

- 
40,987 
- 
- 
- 
40,987 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

Amortised 
cost 
£000 

20,279 
- 
- 
229,251 
1,947 
251,477 

253,459 
4,745 
- 
23,672 

Total 
carrying 
amount 
£000 

20,279 
40,987 
68 
229,251 
1,947 
292,532 

253,459 
4,745 
1,023 
23,672 

281,876 

282,899 

Page | 44  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

5.  Financial instruments - Classification (continued) 

31 December 2020 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Debt securities 
Trading assets 
Loans and advances to customers 
Trade and other receivables 
Total financial assets 

Deposits from customers 
Creditor and accrued charges 
Loan notes 

Total financial liabilities 

Mandatorily 
at FVTPL 
£000 

Designated 
as at FVTPL 
£000 

FVOCI –  
debt 
instruments 
£000 

FVOCI – 
equity 
instruments 
£000 

- 
- 
4 
- 
- 
4 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
25,532 
- 
- 
- 
25,532 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

Amortised 
cost 
£000 

34,053 
- 
- 
193,143 
2,170 
229,366 

218,285 
3,206 
22,222 

Total carrying 
amount 

£000 

34,053 
25,532 
4 
193,143 
2,170 
254,902 

218,285 
3,206 
22,222 

243,713 

243,713 

6.  Financial instruments – Fair values 
For description of the Group’s fair value measurement accounting policy, see note 43(G)(vi). 

The following table shows the carrying amounts and fair values of financial assets and financial liabilities, including their levels in the 
fair value hierarchy. It does not include fair value information for financial assets and financial liabilities not measured at fair value if 
the carrying amount is a reasonable approximation of fair value. 

31 December 2021 

Financial assets measured at fair value 
Debt securities 
Financial asset 

Financial assets not measured at fair value 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Loans and advances to customers 
Trade and other receivables 

Financial liabilities measured at fair value 
Contingent consideration 

Financial liabilities not measured at fair value 
Deposits from customers 
Creditors and accrued charges 
Loan notes 

Carrying 
amount 
Total 
£000 

40,987 
68 
41,055 

20,279 
229,251 
1,947 
251,477 

1,023 
1,023 

253,459 
4,745 
23,672 

281,876 

Fair value 

Level 1 
£000 

Level 2 
£000 

Level 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

40,987 
- 
40,987 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
68 
68 

- 
- 
- 
- 

40,987 
68 
41,055 

- 
- 
- 
- 

1,023 
1,023 

1,023 
1,023 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

Page | 45  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

6.  Financial instruments – Fair values (continued) 

31 December 2020 

Financial assets measured at fair value 
Debt securities 
Trading assets 

Financial assets not measured at fair value 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Loans and advances to customers 
Trade and other receivables 

Financial liabilities measured at fair value 
Contingent consideration 

Financial liabilities not measured at fair value 
Deposits from customers 
Creditors and accrued charges 
Loan notes 

Measurement of fair values 
i. Valuation techniques and significant unobservable inputs  
Type 

Valuation technique 

Debt securities 

Contingent consideration 

Market comparison/discounted 
cash  flow:  The  fair  value  is 
estimated  considering  a  net 
present value calculated using 
discount  rates  derived  from 
quoted yields of securities with 
similar  maturity  and  credit 
rating that are traded in active 
markets. 
Discounted  cash  flows:  The 
valuation  model  considers  the 
present  value  of  the  expected 
future  payments,  discounted 
using  a  risk-adjusted  discount 
rate. 

Carrying 
amount 
Total 
£000 

Fair value 

Level 1 
£000 

Level 2 
£000 

Level 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

25,532 
4 
25,536 

25,532 
4 
25,536 

34,053 
193,143 
2,170 
229,366 

672 
672 

218,285 
3,206 
22,222 
243,713 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

25,532 
4 
25,536 

- 
- 
- 
- 

672 
672 

672 
672 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

Significant 
inputs 

unobservable 

Not applicable. 

between 
Inter-relationship 
significant unobservable inputs 
and fair value measurement 
Not applicable. 

Expected 
flows 
£1,133,820 (2020: £790,869). 

cash 

Risk-adjusted  discount 
14% (2020: 14%). 

rate 

The estimated fair value would 
increase (decrease) if: 
-the expected cash flows were 
higher (lower); or 
-the risk-adjusted discount rate 
were lower (higher).  

Page | 46  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

6.  Financial instruments – Fair values (continued) 
ii. Level 3 recurring fair values 
Reconciliation of Level 3 fair values 
The following table shows a reconciliation from the opening balances to the closing balances for Level 3 fair values. 

Balance at 1 January 

Assumed in a business combination (Note 31) 

Finance costs 
Net change in fair value (unrealised) 

Payment 
Balance at 31 December 

2021 
£000 

672 

387 

114 
(30) 
84 

(120) 
1,023 

2020 
£000 

863 

- 

122 
(253) 
(131) 

(60) 
672 

Sensitivity analysis 
For the fair value of contingent consideration, reasonably possible changes at the reporting date to one of the significant unobservable 
inputs, holding other inputs constant would have the following effects. 

31 December 2021 

Expected cash flows (10% movement) 
Risk-adjusted discount rate (1% movement) 

Profit or loss 

Increase 

Decrease 

113 
(12) 

66 
(8) 

7.  Financial risk review 
Risk management 
This note presents information about the Group’s exposure to financial risks and the Group’s management of capital. For information 
on the Group’s financial risk management framework, see note 37.  

A. Credit risk 
For definition of credit risk and information on how credit risk is mitigated by the Group, see note 41. 

i. Credit quality analysis 
Loans and advances to customers 
Explanation of the terms ‘Stage 1’, ‘Stage 2’ and ‘Stage 3’ is included in note 43(G)(vii). 

An analysis of the credit risk on loans and advances to customers is as follows: 

2021 

2020 

Stage 1 
£000 

Stage 2 
£000 

Stage 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

  Stage 1 
£000 

Stage 2 
£000 

Stage 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

Grade A 
Grade B 
Grade C 
Gross value 

213,103 
- 
342 
213,445 

- 
5,735 
541 
6,276 

- 
5,594 
12,656 
18,250 

213,103 
11,329 
13,539 
237,971 

173,673 
- 
335 
174,008 

- 
5,728 
9 
5,737 

- 
7,751 
12,771 
20,522 

173,673 
13,479 
13,115 
200,267 

Allowance for impairment 
Carrying value 

(503) 
212,942 

(124) 
6,152 

(8,093) 
10,157 

(8,720) 
229,251 

(423) 
173,585 

(18) 
5,719 

(6,683) 
13,839 

(7,124) 
193,143 

Loans are graded A to C depending on the level of risk. Grade A relates to agreements with the lowest risk, Grade B with medium 
risk and Grade C relates to agreements with the highest of risk.  

Page | 47  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

7.  Financial risk review (continued) 
Risk management (continued) 
A. Credit risk (continued) 
i. Credit quality analysis (continued) 
Loans and advances to customers (continued) 

The following table sets out information about the overdue status of loans and advances to customers in Stage 1, 2 and 3: 

31 December  

Current 
Overdue < 30 days 
Overdue > 30 days 

2021 

2020 

Stage 1 
£000 

Stage 2 
£000 

Stage 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

  Stage 1 
£000 

Stage 2 
£000 

Stage 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

210,491 
2,954 
- 
213,445 

- 
- 
 6,276 
6,276 

- 
- 
18,250 
18,250 

210,491 
2,954 
24,526 
237,971 

170,436 
3,572 
- 
174,008 

- 
- 
5,737 
5,737 

- 
- 
20,522 
20,522 

170,436 
3,572 
26,259 
200,267 

For Stage 3 loans and advances that are overdue for more than 30 days, the Bank holds collateral with a value of £11,625,250 (2020: 
£13,362,468) representing security cover of 64% (2020: 65%). 

Debt securities, cash and cash equivalents 
The following table sets out the credit quality of liquid assets:  

Government bonds and treasury bills 
Rated A to A+ 

Floating rate notes 
Rated A to A+ 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Rated A to A+ 

2021 
£000 

2020 
£000 

40,987 

24,431 

- 

1,101 

20,279 

61,266 

34,053 

59,585 

The analysis has been based on Standard & Poor’s ratings. 

ii. Collateral and other credit enhancements 
The Group holds collateral in the form of the underlying assets (typically private and commercial vehicles, plant and machinery) to 
loan arrangements as security for HP, finances leases, vehicle stocking plans, block discounting, wholesale funding arrangements, 
integrated wholesale funding arrangements and secured commercial loan balances, which are sub-categories of loans and advances 
to customers. In addition, the commission share schemes have an element of capital indemnified.  During 2021, 76% of loans and 
advances had an element of capital indemnification (2020: 34.0%).   

At the time of granting credit within the sub-categories listed above, the loan balances due are secured over the underlying assets 
held  as collateral.  Collateral  is  valued  at  the  time of  borrowing,  and  generally are not  updated  except  when  a  loan  is  individually 
assessed as impaired. 

iii. Amounts arising from ECL 
See accounting policy in note 43(G)(vii). 

IFRS 9 significantly overhauled the requirements and methodology used to assess credit impairments by transitioning to a forward-
looking  approach  based  on  an  expected  credit  loss  model.    The  new  impairment  model  applies  to  financial  assets  measured  at 
amortised cost, contract assets and debt investments at FVOCI, but not to investments in equity instruments.  Under IFRS 9, credit 
losses are recognised earlier than under IAS 39 – Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement. 

After a detailed review, the Group devised and implemented an impairment methodology in light of the IFRS 9 requirements outlined 
above noting the following: 

  A  Significant  Increase  in  Credit  Risk  (“SICR”)  is  always deemed  to  occur  when  the  borrower  is  30  days  past  due  on  its 
contractual  payments.    If  the  Group  becomes  aware  ahead  of  this  time  of  non-compliance  or  financial  difficulties  of  the 
borrower, such as loss of employment, avoiding contact with the Group then a SICR has also deemed to occur.  

  The  Group  has  granted  payment  holidays  to  customers  with  no  prior  arrears  based  on  individual  circumstances.  These 
customers are not able to incur further arrears as no payments are being called whilst they are on the payment holiday. 
These customers have not been deemed to have a SICR unless the customer is under exceptional financial hardship due 
to COVID-19. 

Page | 48  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

7.  Financial risk review (continued) 
Risk management (continued) 
A. Credit risk (continued) 
iii. Amounts arising from ECL (continued) 

  A receivable is always deemed to be in default and credit-impaired when the borrower is 90 days past due on its contractual 
payments  or  earlier  if  the  Group  becomes  aware  of  severe  financial  difficulties  such  as  bankruptcy,  individual  voluntary 
arrangements, abscond or disappearance, fraudulent activity or other similar events.  

  The  ECL  was  derived  by  reviewing  the  Group’s  loss  rate  and  loss-given-default  over  the  past  9  years  by  product  and 

geographical segment. 

  The Group has assumed that the future economic conditions will broadly mirror the current environment and therefore the 

forecasted loss levels in the next 3 years will match the Group’s experience in recent years. 

  For  portfolios  where  the  Group  has  never  had  a  default  in  its  history  or  has  robust  credit  enhancements  such  as  credit 

insurance or default indemnities for the entire portfolio, then no IFRS 9 provision is made.   

  If the Group holds objective evidence through specifically assessing a credit-impaired receivable and believes it will go on 
to  completely recover the debt due to the collateral held and cooperation with the borrower,  then no IFRS 9 provision is 
made. 

There have been no significant changes to ECL assumptions from the prior year. 

iv. Concentration of credit risk 

Geographical 
Lending is restricted to individuals and entities with Isle of Man, UK or Channel Islands addresses.  

Segmental 
The Bank is exposed to credit risk with regard to customer loan accounts, comprising HP and finance lease balances, unsecured 
personal loans, secured commercial loans, block discounting, vehicle stocking plan loans and wholesale funding agreements.  In 
addition, the Bank lends via significant introducers into the UK. There was no introducer that accounted for more than 20% of the 
Bank’s total lending portfolio at the end of 31 December 2021 (2020: none). 

B. Liquidity risk 
For the definition of liquidity risk and information on how liquidity risk is manged by the Group, see note 41. 

i. Exposure to liquidity risk 
The key measure used by the Group for managing liquidity risk is the ratio of net liquid assets to deposits from customers and short-
term funding. For this purpose, net liquid assets includes cash and cash equivalents and investment-grade debt securities for which 
there is an active and liquid market. 

Details of the reported Group ratio of net liquid assets to deposits from customers at the reporting date and during the reporting year 
were as follows: 

At 31 December  
Average for the year 
Maximum for the year 
Minimum for the year 

2021 
24% 
25% 
28% 
20% 

2020 
27% 
28% 
32% 
25% 

Page | 49  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

7.  Financial risk review (continued) 
Risk management (continued) 
B. Liquidity risk (continued) 

ii. Maturity analysis for financial liabilities and financial assets 
The table below shows the Group’s financial liabilities classified by their earliest possible contractual maturity, on an undiscounted 
basis including interest due at the end of the deposit term. Based on historical data, the Group’s expected actual cash flow from these 
items vary from this analysis due to the expected re-investment of maturing customer deposits.  

Residual contractual maturities of financial liabilities as at the reporting date (undiscounted): 

31 December 2021 

£000  

Sight-
8 days

>8 days 
- 1 month 
£000 

>1 month  
- 3 months 
£000 

>3 months 
- 6 months 
£000 

>6 months 
- 1 year 
£000 

>1 year
- 3 years
£000

88,036 
9,091 

97,127 

>3 years 
- 5 years 
£000 

16,738 
9,053 

25,791 

Deposits  
Other liabilities 

Total liabilities 

31 December 2020 

Deposits  
Other liabilities 

Total liabilities 

6,864 
291 

7,155 

Sight- 
8 days 
£000 

3,106 
27 

3,133 

4,743 
83 

4,826 

18,359 
1,210 

19,569 

63,733 
1,253 

64,986 

61,891 
10,995 

72,886 

>8 days 
- 1 month 
£000 

>1 month  
- 3 months 
£000 

>3 months 
- 6 months 
£000 

>6 months 
- 1 year 
£000 

>1 year
- 3 years
£000

>3 years 
- 5 years 
£000 

3,194 
88 

3,282 

19,775 
668 

20,443 

53,380 
819 

54,199 

59,023 
3,630 

62,653 

61,491 
16,401 

25,221 
7,851 

77,892 

33,072 

Maturity of assets and liabilities at the reporting date: 

Sight- 
8 days 
£000 

>8 days 
- 1 month 
£000 

>1 month  
- 3 months 
£000 

>3 months 
- 6 months 
£000 

>6 months 
- 1 year 
£000 

>1 year 
- 3 years 
£000 

>3 years 
- 5 years 
£000 

31 December 2021 

Assets 
Cash  
Debt securities 
Loans and advances 
Other assets 

Total assets 

Liabilities 
Deposits  
Other liabilities 

Total liabilities 

20,279 
- 
9,271 
68 

29,618 

6,864 
238 

7,102 

- 
5,001 
8,372 
- 

13,373 

4,285 
- 

4,285 

- 
20,994 
12,378 
- 

33,372 

17,565 
1,000 

18,565 

- 
14,992 
25,458 
- 

40,450 

62,831 
946 

63,777 

- 
- 
30,835 
3,186 

34,021 

60,790 
10,512 

71,302 

- 
- 
94,395 
- 

94,395 

85,350 
7,967 

93,317 

- 
- 
44,081 
6,018 

>5 
years 
£000 

- 
869 

869 

>5 
years 
£000 

- 
1,141 

1,141 

>5 
years 
£000 

- 
- 
4,462 
8,964 

Total 
£000 

260,364 
32,845 

293,209 

Total 
£000 

225,190 
30,625 

255,815 

Total 
£000 

20,279 
40,987 
229,252 
18,236 

50,099 

  13,426 

308,754 

15,774 
8,777 

24,551 

- 
869 

869 

253,459 
30,309 

283,768 

Page | 50  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

7.  Financial risk review (continued) 
Risk management (continued) 
B. Liquidity risk (continued) 
ii. Maturity analysis for financial liabilities and financial assets (continued) 

Maturity of assets and liabilities at the reporting date (continued): 

31 December 2020 

Assets 
Cash  
Debt securities 
Loans and advances 
Other assets 

Total assets 

Liabilities 
Deposits  
Other liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Sight- 
8 days 
£000 

>8 days 
- 1 month 
£000 

>1 month 
- 3 months 
£000 

>3 months 
- 6 months 
£000 

>6 months 
- 1 year 
£000 

>1 year 
- 3 years 
£000 

>3 years 
- 5 years 
£000 

34,053 
- 
6,270 
4 

40,327 

3,106 
- 

3,106 

- 
5,301 
7,750 
- 

13,051 

2,736 
- 

2,736 

- 
14,000 
21,565 
- 

35,565 

18,981 
450 

19,431 

- 
- 
17,822 
- 

17,822 

52,478 
496 

52,974 

- 
6,231 
27,490 
2,578 

36,299 

57,922 
2,983 

60,905 

- 
- 
84,111 
- 

84,111 

58,805 
14,874 

73,679 

- 
- 
25,756 
5,637 

31,393 

24,257 
7,297 

31,554 

>5 
years 
£000 

- 
- 
2,379 
7,014 

9,393 

- 
1,141 

1,141 

iii. Liquidity reserves 
The following table sets out the components of the Group’s liquidity reserves: 

Balances with other banks 
Unencumbered debt securities 
Total liquidity reserves 

2021 
Carrying 
amount 
£000 

20,279 
40,987 
61,266 

2021  
Fair  
value 
£000 

20,279 
40,987 
61,266 

2020 
Carrying 
amount 
£000 

34,053 
25,532 
59,585 

Total 
£000 

34,053 
25,532 
193,143 
15,233 

267,961 

218,285 
27,241 

245,526 

2020  
Fair  
value 
£000 

34,053 
25,532 
59,585 

C. Market risk 
For the definition of market risk and information on how the Group manages the market risks of trading and non-trading portfolios, 
see note 41.  

The following table sets out the allocation of assets and liabilities subject to market risk between trading and non-trading portfolios: 

31 December 2021 

Assets subject to market risk 
Debt securities 
Financial asset 
Total 

31 December 2020 

Assets subject to market risk 
Debt securities 
Financial asset 
Total 

Carrying 
amount 
£000 

40,987 
68 
41,055 

Market risk measure 

Trading 
portfolios 
£000 

  Non-trading 
portfolios 
£000 

- 
- 
- 

40,987 
68 
41,055 

Market risk measure 

Carrying 
amount 
£000 

Trading 
portfolios 
£000 

25,532 
4 
25,536 

- 
4 
4 

Non-
trading 
portfolios 
£000 

25,532 
- 
25,532 

Page | 51  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

7.  Financial risk review (continued) 
Risk management (continued) 
C. Market risk (continued) 

i. Exposure to interest rate risk  
The following tables present the interest rate mismatch position between assets and liabilities over the respective maturity dates. The 
maturity dates are presented on a worst-case basis, with assets being recorded at their latest maturity and deposits from customers 
at their earliest. 

31 December 2021 

  Sight- 
  1 month 
£000 

>1month 
- 3months 
£000 

>3months 
- 6months 
        £000 

 >6months
- 1 year 
  £000 

  >1 year  
- 3 years 
       £000 

 >3 years 
- 5 years 
       £000 

 >5 years 
       £000 

  Non-
Interest 
  Bearing 
  £000 

Total 
£000 

Assets 
20,279 
Cash & cash equivalents 
5,001 
Debt securities 
Loans and advances to customers  17,642 
- 
Other assets 

- 
20,994 
12,378 
- 

- 
  14,992 
  25,458 
- 

- 
- 
  30,835 
- 

- 
- 
  94,395 
- 

- 
- 
  44,081 
- 

- 
- 
4,462 
- 

- 
- 
- 
18,236 

20,279 
40,987 
229,251 
18,236 

Total assets 

42,922 

  33,372 

  40,450 

  30,835 

  94,395 

  44,081 

  4,462 

  18,236 

  308,753 

Liabilities and equity 
Deposits from customers 
Other liabilities 
Total equity 

11,149 
238 
- 

17,565 
1,000 
- 

  62,831 
946 
- 

  60,790 
7,050 
- 

  85,350 
7,967 
- 

  15,774 
8,777 
- 

Total liabilities and equity 

11,387 

18,565 

  63,777 

  67,840 

  93,317 

  24,551 

- 
687 
- 

687 

- 
3,644 
24,985 

28,629 

253,459 
30,309 
24,985 

308,753 

Interest rate sensitivity gap 

31,535 

14,807 

  (23,327) 

  (37,005) 

1,078 

  19,530 

3,775 

(10,393) 

Cumulative 

31,535 

46,312 

  23,015 

  (13,990) 

  (12,912) 

6,618 

  10,393 

- 

31 December 2020 

  Sight- 
  1 month 
£000 

>1month 
- 3months 
£000 

>3months 
- 6months 
        £000 

 >6months
- 1 year 
  £000 

  >1 year  
- 3 years 
       £000 

 >3 years 
- 5 years 
       £000 

 >5 years 
       £000 

  Non-
Interest 
  Bearing 
  £000 

- 

- 

Total 
£000 

Assets 
34,053 
Cash & cash equivalents 
Debt securities 
5,301 
Loans and advances to customers  14,020 
- 
Other assets 

- 
14,000 
21,565 
- 

- 
- 
  17,822 
- 

- 
6,231 
  27,490 
- 

- 
- 
  84,111 
- 

- 
- 
  25,756 
- 

- 
- 
2,379 
- 

- 
- 
- 
15,233 

34,053 
25,532 
193,143 
15,233 

Total assets 

53,374 

  35,565 

  17,822 

  33,721 

  84,111 

  25,756 

  2,379 

  15,233 

  267,961 

Liabilities and equity 
Deposits from customers 
Other liabilities 
Total equity 

Total liabilities and equity 

5,842 
- 
- 

5,842 

18,981 
450 
- 

  52,478 
496 
- 

  57,922 
280 
- 

  58,805 
  14,874 
- 

  24,257 
7,297 
- 

19,431 

  52,974 

  58,202 

  73,679 

  31,554 

- 
944 
- 

944 

- 
2,900 
22,435 

25,335 

218,285 
27,241 
22,535 

267,961 

Interest rate sensitivity gap 

47,532 

16,134 

  (35,152) 

  (24,481) 

  10,432 

(5,798) 

1,435 

(10,102) 

Cumulative 

47,532 

63,666 

  28,514 

4,033 

  14,465 

8,667 

  10,102 

- 

- 

- 

The Bank monitors the impact of changes in interest rates on interest rate mismatch positions using a method consistent with the 
FSA required reporting standard. The methodology applies weightings to the net interest rate sensitivity gap in order to quantify the 
impact of an adverse change in interest rates of 2.0% per annum (2020: 2.0%). The following tables set out the estimated total impact 
of such a change based on the mismatch at the reporting date: 

31 December 2021 

Sight- 
  1 month 

>1month 
-3months 

>3months 
- 6months 

>6months 
  - 1 year 

>1 year  
- 3 years 

>3 years 
  - 5 years 

>5 years 

Interest rate sensitivity gap £000  31,535 

14,807 

(23,327) 

(37,005) 

Weighting 

£000 

0 

- 

0.003 

44 

0.007 

(163) 

0.014 

(518) 

1,078 

0.027 

29 

19,530 

0.054 

1,055 

3,775 

0.115 

434 

Non-
Interest 
  Bearing 

(10,393) 

0 

- 

Total 

- 

0 

881 

Page | 52  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

7.  Financial risk review (continued) 
Risk management (continued) 
C. Market risk (continued) 

i. Exposure to interest rate risk (continued) 

31 December 2020 

Sight- 
  1 month 

>1month 
-3months 

>3months 
- 6months 

>6months 
  - 1 year 

>1 year  
- 3 years 

>3 years 
  - 5 years 

  >5 years 

Interest rate sensitivity gap £000 

47,532 

16,134 

(35,152)

(24,481)

10,432  

(5,798)

Weighting 

£000 

- 

- 

0.003 

48 

0.007 

(246)

0.014 

(343)

0.027  

0.054 

282  

(313) 

165  

Non-
Interest 
  Bearing 

(10,102)

- 

- 

Total 

- 

- 

(407) 

1,435 

0.115 

D. Capital Management 
i. Regulatory capital 
The lead regulator of the Group’s wholly owned subsidiary, the Bank, is the FSA. The FSA sets and monitors capital requirements for 
the Bank. 

The Bank’s regulatory capital consists of the following elements. 

  Common  Equity  Tier  1  (“CET1”)  capital,  which  includes  ordinary  share  capital,  retained  earnings  and  reserves  after 

adjustment for deductions for goodwill, intangible assets and intercompany receivable. 
Tier 2 capital, which includes qualifying subordinated liabilities and any excess of impairment over expected losses. 

 

The FSA’s approach to the measurement of capital adequacy is primarily based on monitoring the relationship of the capital resources 
requirement to available capital resources. The FSA sets individual capital guidance (“ICG”) for the Bank in excess of the minimum 
capital resources requirement. A key input to the ICG setting process is the Bank’s internal capital adequacy assessment process 
(“ICAAP”). 

The Bank is also regulated by the FCA in the UK for credit and brokerage related activities. 

ii. Capital allocation 
Management  uses  regulatory  capital  ratios  to  monitor  its  capital  base.  The  allocation  of  capital  between  specific  operations  and 
activities is, to a large extent, driven by optimisation of the return achieved on the capital allocated. The amount of capital allocated 
to each operation or activity is based primarily on regulatory capital requirements. 

8.  Operating segments 
Segmental information is presented in respect of the Group’s business segments. The Directors consider that the Group currently 
operates in one geographic segment comprising of the Isle of Man, UK and Channel Islands. The primary format, business segments, 
is based on the Group’s management and internal reporting structure. The Directors consider that the Group operates in three (2020: 
four)  product  orientated  segments  in  addition  to  its  investing  activities:  Asset  and  Personal  Finance  (including  provision  of  HP 
contracts,  finance  leases,  personal  loans,  commercial  loans,  block  discounting,  vehicle  stocking  plans  and  wholesale  funding 
agreements);  Edgewater  Associates  Limited  (provision  of  financial  advice);  and  Manx  FX  Limited  (provision  of  foreign  currency 
transaction services).   

For the year ended 31 December 2021 

Net interest income 
Fee and commission income 
Operating income 

Profit / (loss) before tax payable 

Capital expenditure 

Total assets 

Total liabilities 

Asset and 
Personal 
Finance 
£000 

17,980 
811 
16,251 

2,528 

3,083 

292,721 

265,751 

Edgewater 
Associates 
£000 

Manx FX 
£000 

Investing 
Activities 
£000 

- 
2,282 
2,282 

114 

13 

2,330 

638 

- 
1,528 
1,514 

1,227 

1 

802 

61 

Total 
£000 

17,980 
4,621 
20,047 

3,043 

3,102 

- 
- 
- 

(826)

5 

12,900 

17,318 

308,753 

283,768 

Page | 53  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

8.  Operating segments (continued) 

For the year ended 31 December 2020 

Net interest income 
Fee and commission income 
Operating income 

Profit / (loss) before tax payable 

Capital expenditure 

Total assets 
Total liabilities 

9.  Net interest income 

Asset and 
Personal 
Finance 
£000 

Edgewater 
Associates 
£000 

Manx FX 
£000 

Investing 
Activities 
£000 

15,470 
430 
13,206 

1,316 

1,138 

260,155 
230,001 

- 
2,103 
2,103 

(94) 

46 

2,638 
660 

- 
1,332 
1,096 

1,096 

2 

536 
12 

Interest income 
Loans and advances to customers 
Total interest income calculated using the effective interest method 
Operating lease income  
Total interest income 

Interest expense 
Deposits from customers 
Loan note interest 
Lease liability 
Contingent consideration: interest expense 
Total interest expense 

Net interest income 

Total 
£000 

15,470 
3,865 
16,405 

- 
- 
- 

(297) 

2,021 

1 

1,187 

4,632 
14,853 

267,961 
245,526 

2021 
£000 

21,010 
21,010 
1,937 
22,947 

(3,512) 
(1,299) 
(42) 
(114) 
(4,967) 

2020 
£000 

19,484 
19,484 
1,208 
20,692 

(4,044) 
(1,016) 
(40) 
(122) 
(5,222) 

17,980 

15,470 

10.  Net fee and commission income 
In the following table, fee and commission income from contracts with customers in the scope of IFRS 15 – Revenue from Contracts 
with  Customers  is  disaggregated  by  major  type  of  services.  The  table  includes  a  reconciliation  of  the  disaggregated  fee  and 
commission income with the Group’s reportable segments. See note 43D regarding revenue recognition. 

Major service lines 
EAL: Independent financial advice income 
MFX: Foreign exchange trading income 
Asset and personal finance: Brokerage services income 
MCL: Debt collection 
Fee and commission income 

Fee and commission expense 

Net fee and commission income 

2021 
£000 

2,282 
1,528 
510 
301 
4,621 

2020 
£000 

2,103 
1,332 
430 
- 
3,865 

(3,339) 

(3,481) 

1,282 

384 

Page | 54  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

11.  Personnel expenses 

Staff gross salaries  
Executive Directors’ remuneration 
Non-executive Directors’ fees 
Executive Directors’ pensions 
Executive Directors’ performance related pay 
Staff pension costs 
National insurance and payroll taxes 
Staff training and recruitment costs 

12.  Other expenses 

Professional and legal fees 
Marketing costs 
IT costs 
Establishment costs 
Communication costs 
Travel costs 
Bank charges 
Insurance 
Irrecoverable VAT 
Other costs 

2021 
£000 

(5,416) 
(440) 
(176) 
(34) 
(51) 
(330) 
(623) 
(86) 

(7,156) 

2021 
£000 

(1,367) 
(264) 
(1,001) 
(317) 
(129) 
(104) 
(124) 
(344) 
(268) 
(582) 

(4,500) 

2020 
£000 

(5,331) 
(299) 
(163) 
(21) 
(50) 
(297) 
(606) 
(56) 

(6,823) 

2020 
£000 

(1,063) 
(177) 
(822) 
(270) 
(105) 
(95) 
(151) 
(300) 
(436) 
(288) 

(3,707) 

13.  Impairment on loans and advances to customers 
The charge in respect of allowances for impairment comprises, excluding loss allowances on financial assets managed on a collective 
basis. 

Impairment allowances made 
Reversal of allowances previously made 

Total charge for provision for impairment 

2021 
£000 

(5,457) 
1,055 

(4,402) 

The charge in respect of allowances for impairment on financial assets managed on a collective basis comprises:  

Collective impairment allowances made 
Release of allowances previously made 

Total credit / (charge) for allowances for impairment on financial assets managed on a collective basis 

2021 
£000 

(77) 
119 

42 

2020 
£000 

(6,833) 
3,039 

(3,794) 

2020 
£000 

(421) 
265 

(156) 

Total charge for allowances for impairment 

(4,360) 

(3,950) 

14.  Profit before tax payable 
The profit before tax payable for the year is stated after charging:  

Auditor’s remuneration:  

as Auditor current year 
 non-audit services 

Pension cost defined benefit scheme 
Operating lease rentals for property 

Group 

Company 

2021 
£000 

(232) 
(2) 
(13) 
(64) 

2020 
£000 

(167) 
(10) 
(16) 
(97) 

2021 
£000 

- 
- 
- 
- 

2020 
£000 

- 
- 
- 
- 

Page | 55  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

15.  Income tax expense 

Current tax expense 
Current year 
Changes to estimates for prior years 

Deferred tax expense 
Origination and reversal of temporary differences 

Tax expense  

Reconciliation of effective tax rate 
Profit before tax  
Tax using the Bank’s domestic tax rate 
Effect of tax rates in foreign jurisdictions 
Tax exempt income 
Timing difference in current year 
Changes to estimates for prior years 
Origination and reversal of temporary differences in deferred tax 
R&D claim 
Tax expense 

2021 
£000 

(132) 
(50) 
(182) 

(52) 

(234) 

% 

(10.0) 
1.4 
0.0 
3.2 

2.8 
0.0 
(2.6) 

2020 
£000 

3 
- 
3 

(56) 

(53) 

2020 
£000 

2,021 
(202) 
28 
- 
65 

56 
- 
(53) 

% 

(10.0) 
(1.45) 
5.19 
0.0 
1.64 
(1.71) 
(1.38) 
(11.41) 

2021 
£000 

3,043 
(304) 
(44) 
158 
- 
50 
(52) 
(42) 
(234) 

The main rate of corporation tax in the Isle of Man is 0.0% (2020: 0.0%). However, the profits of the Group’s Isle of Man banking 
activities are taxed at 10.0% (2020: 10.0%). The profits of the Group’s subsidiaries that are subject to UK corporation tax are taxed 
at a rate of 19.0% (2020: 19.0%).  

The value of tax losses carried forward reduced to nil and there is now a timing difference related to accelerated capital allowances 
resulting in a £182,000 liability (2020: £197,000 liability). This resulted in an expense of £52,000 (2020: £56,000) to the Consolidated 
Income Statement offset by a deferred tax credit on the defined benefit pension through the OCI of £67,000 (2020: £nil).  

16.  Earnings per share 

Profit for the year 

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares in issue (basic) 
Basic earnings per share (pence) 
Diluted earnings per share (pence) 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares in issue (basic) 
Basic earnings per share (pence) 
Diluted earnings per share (pence) 

2021 

2020 

£2,809,000 

£1,968,000 

114,291,639 
2.46 
1.97 

118,964,270 
1.65 
1.37 

£3,045,000 

£1,676,000 

114,291,639 
2.66 
2.13 

118,964,270 
1.41 
1.19 

The basic earnings per share calculation is based upon the profit for the year after taxation and the weighted average of the number 
of shares in issue throughout the year.  

Page | 56  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

16.  Earnings per share (continued) 
As at: 

Reconciliation of weighted average number of Ordinary Shares in issue between 
basic and diluted 

2021 

2020 

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares (basic) 
Number of shares issued if all convertible loan notes were exchanged for equity 
Dilutive element of share options if exercised 

114,291,639 
36,555,556 
- 

118,964,270 
36,555,556 
- 

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares (diluted) 

150,847,195 

155,519,826 

Reconciliation of profit for the year between basic and diluted 

Profit for the year (basic) 
Interest expense saved if all convertible loan notes were exchanged for equity  

Profit for the year (diluted) 

£2,809,000 
£166,250 

£1,968,000 
£166,250 

£2,975,250 

£2,134,250 

The diluted earnings per share calculation assumes that all convertible loan notes and share options have been converted / exercised 
at the beginning of the year where they are dilutive.  

As at: 

2021 

2020 

Reconciliation of total comprehensive income for the year between basic and diluted 

Total comprehensive income for the year (basic) 
Interest expense saved if all convertible loan notes were exchanged for equity  

Total comprehensive income for the year (diluted) 

17.  Cash and cash equivalents 

Cash at bank and in hand 
Notice account balance (less than 90 days) 
Fixed deposit (less than 90 days) 

£3,045,000 
£166,250 

£1,676,000 
£166,250 

£3,211,250 

£1,842,250 

Group 

Company 

2021 
£000 

18,278 
2,001 
- 

20,279 

2020 
£000 

11,728 
21,025 
1,300 

34,053 

2021 
£000 

430 
- 
- 

430 

2020 
£000 

1,378 
- 
- 

1,378 

2020 
£000 

- 
- 

- 

Cash at bank includes an amount of £56,000 (2020: £120,000) representing receipts which are in the course of transmission. 

18.  Debt securities 

Financial assets at FVOCI: 
UK Government Treasury Bills 
Floating Rate Notes 

Group 

Company 

2021 
£000 

40,987 
- 

40,987 

2020 
£000 

24,431 
1,101 

25,532 

2021 
£000 

- 
- 

- 

UK Government Treasury Bills are stated at fair value and unrealised changes in the fair value are reflected in other comprehensive 
income. There were realised losses of £1,000 (2020: gains of £261,000) and unrealised losses of £18,000 (2020: unrealised losses 
of £51,000) during the year. 

Page | 57  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

19.  Financial assets 

Financial assets at FVOCI: 
Gain on Contingent consideration (see note 6(ii)) 
Gain on equity instrument 

Group 

Company 

2021 
£000 

30 
- 

30 

2020 
£000 

253 
6 

259 

2021 
£000 

- 
- 

- 

2020 
£000 

- 
- 

- 

The equity instrument representing an investment in a UK quoted company was disposed of during the period at the carrying amount. 
No gain / loss has thus been recognised due to the disposal. 

The Bank acquired a new equity instrument during the financial year. (See Note 33) 

20.  Loans and advances to customers 

Group 

HP balances 
Finance lease balances 
Unsecured personal loans 
Vehicle stocking plans 
Wholesale funding arrangements 
Block discounting 
Secured commercial loans 
Secured personal loans 
Government backed loans 

Gross 
Amount 
£000 

71,789 
28,131 
31,267 
1,675 
15,447 
16,465 
11,099 
1,739 
60,358 
237,970 

2021 
Impairment 
Allowance 
£000 

(4,107) 
(3,317) 
(537) 
- 
- 
- 
(519) 
- 
(239) 
(8,719) 

Carrying 
Value 
£000 

67,682 
24,814 
30,730 
1,675 
15,447 
16,465 
10,580 
1,739 
60,119 
229,251 

Gross 
Amount 
£000 

72,930 
34,373 
27,762 
1,807 
18,080 
13,848 
9,602 
2,152 
19,710 
200,264 

2020 
Impairment 
Allowance 
£000 

(1,779) 
(3,241) 
(364) 
- 
(808) 
(418) 
(511) 
- 
- 
(7,121) 

Carrying 
Value 
£000 

71,151 
31,132 
27,398 
1,807 
17,272 
13,430 
9,091 
2,152 
19,710 
193,143 

Collateral  is  held  in  the  form  of  underlying  assets  for  HP,  finance  leases,  vehicles  stocking  plans,  block  discounting,  secured 
commercial and personal loans and wholesale funding arrangements.  

Allowance for impairment 

Balance at 1 January 
Allowance for impairment made 
Release of allowances previously made 
Write-offs 
Balance at 31 December 

Collective allowance for impairment 

Balance at 1 January 
Collective allowance for impairment made 
Release of allowances previously made 

Balance at 31 December 

Total allowances for impairment 

2021 
£000 

6,824 
5,457 
(1,055) 
(2,762) 
8,464 

2021 
£000 

297 
77 
(119) 

255 

8,719 

2020 
£000 

4,632 
5,231 
(1,519) 
(1,520) 
6,824 

2020 
£000 

141 
421 
(265) 

297 

7,121 

Advances  on  preferential  terms  are  available  to  all  Directors,  management  and  staff.  As  at  31  December  2021  £945,625  (2020: 
£629,345) had been lent on this basis. In the Group’s ordinary course of business, advances may be made to Shareholders, but all 
such advances are made on normal commercial terms (see note 33).  

Page | 58  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

20.  Loans and advances to customers (continued) 
At the end of the current financial year 5 loan exposures (2020: 6) exceeded 10.0% of the capital base of the Bank:  

Exposure 

Block discounting facility 
Wholesale funding agreement 

Outstanding 
Balance 
2021 
£000 

16,465 
25,645 

Outstanding 
Balance 
2020 
£000 

5,878 
16,315 

HP and finance lease receivables 
Loans and advances to customers include the following HP and finance lease receivables: 

Less than one year 
Between one and five years 

Gross investment in HP and finance lease receivables 

The investment in HP and finance lease receivables net of unearned income comprises: 

Facility 
Limit 
£000 

46,529 
37,042 

2020 
£000 

52,028 
71,348 

123,376 

2020 
£000 

45,250 
62,053 

107,303 

2021 
£000 

34,833 
58,949 

93,782 

2021 
£000 

32,495 
54,994 

87,489 

Less than one year 
Between one and five years 

Net investment in HP and finance lease receivables 

21.  Trade and other receivables 

Prepayments 
VAT claim 
Other debtors 

Group 

Company 

2021 
£000 

498 
- 
1,449 
1,947 

2020 
£000 

482 
586 
1,102 
2,170 

2021 
£000 

100 
371 
1 
472 

2020 
£000 

53 
256 
- 
309 

After consultation with its professional advisors, the Bank made a notice of error correction (“NEC”) to the Isle of Man Government 
Customs & Exercise Division in respect of a repayment for overpaid VAT to the amount of £534,000 exclusive of statutory interest. 
The NEC relates to bad debt relief that was not claimed during the period from 1 April 1989 to 18 March 1997. The Bank recognised 
a receivable and income of £534,000 during 2020. 

The VAT claim was settled in full and the Bank received £699,000 during the period. An additional recovery of £113,000 over and  
above the carrying amount recognised at year end has been recognised in profit and loss. 

Page | 59  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

22.  Property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets 

Group 

Cost 
As at 1 January 2021 

Revaluation 
Additions 
Disposals 
As at 31 December 2021 

Accumulated depreciation 
As at 1 January 2021 

Charge for year 
Disposals 

As at 31 December 2021 

Carrying value at 31 December 2021 

Carrying value at 31 December 2020 

Buildings and 
Leasehold 
Improvements 
£000 

IT 
Equipment 
£000 

Furniture and 
Equipment 
£000 

Motor 
Vehicles1 
£000 

Right-of-
use assets 
£000 

Total 
£000 

698 

15 
25 
(57) 
681 

384 

55 
(12) 

427 

254 

314 

462 

- 
62 
(87) 
437 

343 

61 
(91) 

313 

124 

119 

4,332 

- 
2,019 
(422) 
5,929 

801 

389 
(381) 

809 

5,120 

3,531 

2,477 

- 
3 
(1,769) 
711 

804 

277 
(890) 

191 

520 

1,673 

737 

8,706 

- 
993 
(285) 
1,445 

329 

162 
(285) 

206 

1,239 

408 

15 
3,102 
(2,620) 
9,203 

2,661 

944 
(1,659) 

1,946 

7,257 

6,045 

1Included in motor vehicles are operating leases with the Group as lessor. Depreciation on leasing assets was £269,000 (2020: £406,000). 

Buildings with an original cost of £160,000 were revalued by independent valuers Vospers Limited to £175,000 on the basis of market value 
as at 15 September 2021. The valuation conforms to International Valuation Standards and was based on recent market transactions on 
arm's length terms for similar properties. The Directors consider the valuation of the Buildings as at 31 December 2021 remains £175,000. 

Company 

Cost 
As at 1 January 2021 
Additions 
Disposals 

As at 31 December 2021 

Accumulated depreciation 
As at 1 January 2021 
Charge for year 
Disposals 

As at 31 December 2021 

Carrying value at 31 December 2021 

Carrying value at 31 December 2020 

Leasehold 
Improvements 
£000 

IT 
Equipment 
£000 

Furniture and 
Equipment 
£000 

Right-of 
use-assets 
£000 

234 
- 
- 

234 

207 
27 
- 

234 

- 

27 

18 
- 
- 

18 

5 
1 
- 

6 

12 

13 

17 
- 
- 

17 

7 
2 
- 

9 

8 

10 

424 
- 
- 

424 

120 
61 
- 

181 

243 

304 

Total 
£000 

693 
- 
- 

693 

339 
91 
- 

430 

263 

354 

Page | 60  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

23.  Intangible assets 

Group 

Cost 
As at 1 January 2021 
Acquisition of subsidiary (see note 31) 
Additions 
Disposals 
As at 31 December 2021 

Accumulated amortisation 
As at 1 January 2021 
Charge for year  
Disposals 

As at 31 December 2021 

Carrying value at 31 December 2021 

Carrying value at 31 December 2020 

24.  Deposits from customers 

Retail customers: term deposits 
Corporate customers: term deposits 

25.  Creditors and accrued charges 

Commission creditors 
Other creditors and accruals 
Lease liability 
Taxation creditors 

26.  Loan notes 

Related parties 
J Mellon 
Burnbrae Limited 
Southern Rock Insurance Company Limited 

Unrelated parties 

Customer 
Contracts  
£000 

Intellectual  
Property Rights 
£000 

IT Software and 
Website 
Development 
£000 

749 
- 
- 
- 
749 

523 
- 
- 

523 

226 

226 

2,320 
- 
221 
- 
2,541 

1,772 
279 
- 

2,051 

490 

548 

Total 
£000 

4,989 
199 
481 
278 
5,947 

2,703 
458 
278 

3,439 

2,508 

2,286 

2021 
£000 

242,788 
10,671 

253,459 

2020 
£000 

209,235 
9,050 

218,285 

2021 
£000 

1,520 
1,380 
1,295 
550 

4,745 

2021 
£000 

1,750 
3,200 
2,097 

7,047 
16,625 
23,672 

Group 

Company 

2020 
£000 

1,748 
822 
503 
133 

3,206 

2021 
£000 

- 
182 
319 
- 

501 

Group 

Company 

2020 
£000 

1,750 
3,200 
2,097 

7,047 
15,175 
22,222 

2021 
£000 

1,750 
3,200 
2,097 

7,047 
16,625 
23,672 

2020 
£000 

- 
83 
418 
- 

501 

2020 
£000 

1,750 
3,200 
2,097 

7,047 
15,175 
22,222 

1,920 
199 
260 
278 
2,657 

408 
179 
278 

865 

1,792 

1,512 

Notes 

JM 
BL 
SR 

UP 

JM – Two loans, one of £1,250,000 maturing on 26 February 2025, paying interest of 5.4% per annum, and one of £500,000 maturing 
on 31 July 2022 paying interest of 5.0% per annum. Both loans are convertible at the rate of 7.5 pence and 9 pence respectively.  

Page | 61  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

26.  Loan notes (continued) 
BL – Three loans, one of £1,200,000 maturing on 31 July 2022, paying interest of 5.0% per annum, one of £1,000,000 maturing 25 
February 2025, paying interest of  5.4% per annum, and one of  £1,000,000 maturing 28 February 2025 paying interest of  6% per 
annum.  Jim Mellon is the beneficial owner of BL and Denham Eke is also a director.  The £1,200,000 loan is convertible at a rate of 
7.5 pence.   

SR – One loan consisting of £2,097,085 maturing on 14 April 2025, paying interest of 6.5% per annum.   

UP – Forty-two loans (2020: Thirty-three) consisting of an average £461,806 (2020: £459,848) with an average interest payable of 
5.7% (2020: 5.8%) per annum.  The earliest maturity date is 3 January 2022 and the latest maturity is 3 November 2026.  

With respect to the convertible loans, the interest rate applied was deemed by the Directors to be equivalent to the market rate at the 
time with no conversion option.  
27.  Pension liability 
The Conister Trust Pension and Life Assurance Scheme (“Scheme”) operated by the Bank is a funded defined benefit arrangement 
which  provides  retirement  benefits  based  on  final  pensionable  salary.  The  Scheme  is  closed  to  new  entrants  and  the  last  active 
member of the Scheme left pensionable service in 2011. 

The Scheme is approved in the Isle of Man by the Assessor of Income Tax under the Income Tax (Retirement Benefit Schemes) Act 
1978 and must comply with the relevant legislation. In addition, it is registered as an authorised scheme with the FSA in the Isle of 
Man under the Retirement Benefits Scheme Act 2000.  The Scheme is subject to  regulation by the FSA but there is no minimum 
funding regime in the Isle of Man.  

The  Scheme  is  governed  by  two  corporate  trustees,  Conister  Bank  Limited  and  Boal  &  Co  (Pensions)  Limited.  The  trustees  are 
responsible for the Scheme’s investment policy and for the exercise of discretionary powers in respect of the Scheme’s benefits. 

The rules of the Scheme state:  “Each Employer shall pay such sums in each Scheme Year as are estimated to be required to provide 
the benefits of the Scheme in respect of the Members in its employ”. 

Exposure to risk 
The Company is exposed to the risk that additional contributions will be required in order to  fund the Scheme as a result of poor 
experience. Some of the key factors that could lead to shortfalls are: 

investment performance – the return achieved on the Scheme’s assets may be lower than expected; and 

 
  mortality – members could live longer than foreseen. This would mean that benefits are paid for longer than expected, increasing 

the value of the related liabilities. 

In order to assess the sensitivity of the Scheme’s pension liability to these risks, sensitivity analyses have been carried out. Each 
sensitivity analysis is based on changing one of the assumptions used in the calculations, with no change in the other assumptions. 
The same method has been applied as was used to calculate the original pension liability and the results are presented in comparison 
to  that  liability.  It  should  be  noted  that  in  practice  it  is  unlikely  that  one  assumption  will  change  without  a  movement  in  the  other 
assumptions; there may also be some correlation between some of these assumptions. It should also be noted that the value placed 
on the liabilities does not change on a straight line basis when one of the assumptions is changed. For example, a 2.0% change in 
an assumption will not necessarily produce twice the effect on the liabilities of a 1.0% change. 

No  changes  have  been  made  to  the  method  or  to  the  assumptions  stress-tested  for  these  sensitivity  analyses  compared  to  the 
previous period. The investment strategy of the Scheme has been set with regard to the liability profile of the Scheme. However, there 
are no explicit asset-liability matching strategies in place.  

Restriction of assets 
No adjustments have been made to the statement of financial position items as a result of the requirements of IFRIC 14 – IAS 19: The 
Limit  on  a  Defined  Benefit  Asset,  Minimum  Funding  Requirements  and  their  Interaction,  issued  by  IASB’s  International  Financial 
Reporting Interpretations Committee. 

Scheme amendments 
There have not been any past service costs or settlements in the financial year ending 31 December 2021 (2020: none). 

Page | 62  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

27.  Pension liability (continued) 
Funding policy 
The  funding  method  employed  to  calculate  the  value  of  previously  accrued  benefits  is  the  Projected  Unit  Method.  Following  the 
cessation of accrual of benefits when the last active member left service in 2011, regular future service contributions to the Scheme 
are no longer required. However, additional contributions will still be required to cover any shortfalls that might arise following each 
funding valuation. 

The  most  recent  triennial  full  actuarial  valuation  was  carried  out  at  31  March  2020,  which  showed  that  the  market  value  of  the 
Scheme’s assets was £1,432,000 representing 65.2% of the benefits that had accrued to members, after allowing for expected future 
increases in earnings. As required by IAS 19: Employee Benefits, this valuation has been updated by the actuary as at 31 December 
2021. 

The amounts recognised in the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position are as follows: 

Total underfunding in funded plans recognised as a liability 

Fair value of plan assets 
Present value of funded obligations 

Movement in the liability for defined benefit obligations 

Opening defined benefit obligations at 1 January  
Benefits paid by the plan 
Interest on obligations 
Actuarial (gain) / loss 

Liability for defined benefit obligations at 31 December 

Movement in plan assets 

Opening fair value of plan assets at 1 January 
Expected return on assets 
Contribution by employer 
Actuarial gain / (loss) 
Benefits paid 

Closing fair value of plan assets at 31 December 

Expense recognised in income statement 

Interest on obligation 
Expected return on plan assets 

Total included in personnel costs 

Actual return on plan assets 

Actuarial gain / (loss) recognised in other comprehensive income  

Actuarial gain / (loss) on plan assets 
Actuarial gain / (loss) on defined benefit obligations 

2021 
£000 

1,543 
(2,230) 

(687) 

2021 
£000 

2,350 
(74) 
32 
(78) 

2,230 

2021 
£000 

1,406 
19 
98 
94 
(74) 

1,543 

2021 
£000 

32 
(19) 

13 

113 

2021 
£000 

94 
78 

172 

2020 
£000 

1,406 
(2,350) 

(944) 

2020 
£000 

2,159 
(76) 
45 
222 

2,350 

2020 
£000 

1,471 
30 
- 
(19) 
(76) 

1,406 

2020 
£000 

45 
(30) 

15 

11 

2020 
£000 

(19) 
(222) 

(241) 

Page | 63  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

27.  Pension liability (continued) 

Plan assets consist of the following 

Equity securities 
Corporate bonds 
Government bonds 
Cash 
Other 

The actuarial assumptions used to calculate Scheme liabilities under IAS19 are as follows: 

Rate of increase in pension in payment:  
Service up to 5 April 1997 
Service from 6 April 1997 to 13 September 2005 
Service from 14 September 2005 
Rate of increase in deferred pensions 
Discount rate applied to scheme liabilities 
Inflation 

2021 
% 

52 
26 
17 
2 
3 

100 

2020 
% 

47 
19 
29 
2 
3 

100 

2021 
% 

2020 
% 

2019 
% 

- 
3.4 
2.2 
5.0 
1.7 
3.5 

- 
2.9 
2.1 
5.0 
1.8 
3.0 

- 
3.0 
2.1 
5.0 
2.9 
3.1 

The assumptions used by the actuary are best estimates chosen from a range of possible assumptions, which due to the timescale 
covered, may not necessarily be borne out in practice.  

28.  Called up share capital  
Ordinary shares of no par value available for issue 

At 31 December 2021 

At 31 December 2020 

Issued and fully paid: Ordinary shares of no par value 

At 31 December 2021 

At 31 December 2020 

       Number 

200,200,000 

200,200,000 

£000 

19,133 

19,121 

       Number 

114,291,639 

114,130,077 

On 7 July 2021, a Dividend was declared for £196,800 which could either be taken up in cash or Shares.  161,562 new Shares were 
elected to be taken as Shares and were admitted to the Alternative Investment Market (“AIM”) for 7.0575 pence per Share, being a 
total cost of £11,402, on 10 August 2021.  

On  9  April  2020,  the  Company  and  Southern  Rock  Insurance  Company  Limited  (“SR”)  entered  into  a  share  buyback  agreement 
(“SBA”), pursuant to which SR agreed to sell 16,966,158 Ordinary Shares for a consideration of £1,611,785. The consideration was 
left outstanding as a loan agreement (see note 26). The Ordinary Shares acquired were cancelled, and the Company’s issued share 
capital reduced to 114,130,077 Ordinary Shares effective 14 April 2020. 

Prior to the SBA, SR had a loan of £460,000, made to the Company, which was due to be repaid or converted into Ordinary Shares 
on or before 26 April 2020. Upon completion of the SBA, the Company and SR entered into an agreement varying the terms of the 
convertible loan such that they became subject to the terms of the SBA which contains no ability to convert the amounts outstanding 
into Ordinary Shares. The principal amount outstanding in respect of the convertible loan was increased by £25,300 to account for 
the reduction of the interest rate in transition to the SBA.  

There are three convertible loans totalling £2,950,000 (2020: £2,950,000).   

On  23  June  2014,  1,750,000  share  options  were  issued  to  Executive  Directors  and  senior  management  within  the  Group  at  an 
exercise price of 14 pence. The options vest over three years with a charge based on the fair value of 8 pence per option at the date 
of grant. The period of grant is for 10 years less 1 day ending 22 June 2024. Of the 1,750,000 share options issued, 1,050,000 (2020: 
1,050,000) remain outstanding. 

Page | 64  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

28.  Called up share capital (continued) 
Performance and service conditions attached to share options that have not fully vested are as follows: The options granted on 23 
June 2014 require a minimum of three years’ continuous employment service in order to exercise upon the vesting date. 

The fair value of services received in return for share options granted is based on the fair value of share options granted, measured 
using a binomial probability model with the following inputs for each award: 

Fair value at date of grant 
Share price at date of grant 
Exercise price 
Expected volatility 
Option life 
Risk-free interest rate (based on government bonds) 
Forfeiture rate 

The charge for the year for share options granted was £nil (2020: £nil). 

Analysis of changes in financing during the year 

Balance at 1 January 
Issue of loan notes 
Issue of lease liability 
Issue of shares via scrip dividend 
Payment of lease liabilities 

Balance at 31 December 

23 June 
2014 

£0.08 
£0.14 
£0.14 
55.0% 
3 
0.5% 
33.3% 

2021 
£000 

41,846 
1,450 
 993 
12 
(201) 

44,100 

2020 
£000 

37,410 
4,640 
- 
- 
(204) 

41,846 

The  2021  closing  balance  is  represented  by  £19,133,000  share  capital  (2020:  £19,121,000),  £23,672,000  of  loan  notes  (2020: 
£22,222,000) and £1,295,000 lease liability (2020: £503,000). 

29.  List of associates 
Set out below is a list of associates of the Group:  

The Business Lending Exchange (“BLX”) 
Payitmonthly Ltd (“PIML”) 

Group 
2021 
£000 

- 
136 
136 

Group 
2020 
£000 

190 
126 
316 

In December 2017, 40.0% of the share capital of BLX was acquired for nil consideration. During the year, the Group obtained control 
of the subsidiary (see note 31). Prior to obtaining control, the share of the associate’s total comprehensive income during the year 
was £22,000 (2020: 23,000). 

In  August  2018,  30%  of  the  share  capital  of  PIML  was  acquired  for  £90,000  consideration.  The  Group’s  resulting  share  of  the 
associate’s total comprehensive income during the year was £10,000 (2020: £31,000). 

In April 2018, 20% of the share capital of BSL was acquired for nil consideration. During 2020, the Group obtained control of the 
subsidiary. Prior to obtaining control, the share of the associate’s total comprehensive income during the year was £nil (2020: 10,000). 

Page | 65  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

30.  List of subsidiaries 
Set out below is a list of subsidiaries of the Group:  

Carrying value of investments 

Conister Bank Limited 
Edgewater Associates Limited 
TranSend Holdings Limited 
Manx Ventures Limited (MVL) 

Nature of 
Business 

31 December 
2021 
% Holding 

Date of 
Incorporation 

Asset and Personal Finance 
Wealth Management 
Holding Company 
Holding Company 

100 
100 
100 
100 

05/12/1935 
24/12/1996 
05/11/2007 
15/05/2009 

All subsidiaries are incorporated in the Isle of Man. 

31.  Acquisition of subsidiary 
The Business Lending Exchange (“BLX”) 

2021 
£000 

20,592 
2,005 
- 
- 
22,597 

2020 
£000 

20,592 
2,005 
- 
- 
22,597 

On 11 October 2021, the Group (through MVL) announced that it entered into an agreement to acquire 60% of the shares and voting 
interests in BLX. As a result, the Group’s equity interest in BLX increased from 40% to 100%, thereby obtaining control of BLX.  

Regulated by the FCA under Consumer Credit Authorisations, BLX primarily lends to start-up companies and small businesses which 
require asset backed finance.   

This acquisition strengthens the Group’s strategy of developing a network of niche loan brokers within the UK.  

For the 3 months ended 31 December 2021, BLX contributed revenue of £438,864 and profit of £193,395 to the Group’s results. If 
the acquisition had occurred on 1 January 2021, management estimates that the impact on consolidated fee income would have been 
£1,444,137 and the impact on consolidated profit for the period would have been £642,648. 

A. BLX - Consideration transferred 

The following table summarises the acquisition date fair value of each major class of consideration transferred: 

Cash 
Contingent consideration 
Settlement of pre-existing relationship 

£000 

921 
387 
5,216 

6,524 

Up to £483,663 consideration is payable to the sellers in addition to the cash consideration of £920,503. The total amount payable is 
contingent on the recovery of certain loans and advances found to be in default at acquisition. 

B. BLX - Settlement of pre-existing relationship 

The Bank and BLX were parties to a wholesale loan agreement and a Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan with the Bank as lender 
and BLX as borrower. This pre-existing relationship was effectively terminated when the Bank acquired BLX. 

C. BLX - Acquisition-related costs 

The Group incurred acquisition-related costs of £25,000 relating to external legal fees and due diligence costs. These costs have 
been included in ‘other costs’ in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. 

D. BLX - Identifiable assets acquired, and liabilities assumed 

The following table summarises the recognised amounts of assets acquired, and liabilities assumed at the date of acquisition: 

Intangible assets – customer related 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade and other receivables 
Creditors and accrued charges 

Total identifiable net assets acquired 

£000 

199 
676 
5,196 
(583) 

5,488 

Page | 66  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

31.  Acquisition of subsidiary (continued) 
E. BLX – Measurement of fair values 

The valuation techniques use for measuring the fair value of material assets acquired were as follows: 

Assets acquired 

Intangible assets 

Valuation technique 

Multi-period excess earnings method: The multi-period excess 
earnings method considers the present value of net cash flows 
expected to be generated by the customer relationships. 

The trade and other receivables comprise gross contractual amounts due of £6,237,576, of which £1,042,095 was expected to be 
uncollectable at the date of acquisition. 

F. BLX - Goodwill 

The goodwill arising from the acquisition has been recognised as follows: 

Total consideration transferred 
Fair value of existing interest in BLX 
Fair value of identifiable net assets 

Goodwill 

£’000 

6,524 
872 
(5,488) 

1,908 

The remeasurement to fair value of the Bank’s existing 20% interest in BLX resulted in a gain of £660,000 (£872,000 less the £212,000 
carrying  amount  of  the  equity  accounted  investee  at  the  date  of  acquisition).  This  amount  has  been  included  separately  in  the 
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. 

Ninkasi Rentals & Finance Limited (“NRFL”) (formerly Beer Swaps Limited (“BSL”)) 

On 28 February 2020, the Group (through the Bank) announced that it entered into an agreement to acquire 55% of the shares and 
voting interests in BSL. As a result, the Group’s equity interest in BSL increased from 20% to 75%, thereby obtaining control of BSL. 
BSL provides equipment finance and rental products to UK based craft and micro-breweries.  This acquisition strengthens the Group’s 
strategy of developing a network of niche loan brokers within the UK.  

The consideration transferred was £2,957,000 and transaction costs of £30,000 were incurred. The net fair value of identifiable assets 
acquired and liabilities assumed was £2,587,000. Goodwill of £678,000 was recognised. 

The remeasurement to fair value of the Bank’s existing 20% interest in BSL resulted in a gain of £237,000 (£257,000 less the £20,000 
carrying  amount  of  the  equity  accounted  investee  at  the  date  of  acquisition).  This  amount  has  been  included  separately  in  the 
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. 

Blue Star Business Solutions Limited (“BBSL”) 

On 16 April 2019, the Group (through BBL) acquired 100% of the shares and voting interest in BBSL, obtaining control of BBSL. The 
Group agreed to pay the selling shareholders: 

 
 

50% of net profits in BBSL for 3 years post completion; and 
50% of the incremental net profit that the Group benefits from as a result of taking up BBSL loan proposals post completion 
up until the third anniversary. 

This is to be paid on each anniversary with a final payment in year 4 for the unrealised lending profit. The total consideration is to 
have a cap of £4,000,000 in total. The contingent consideration is calculated by forecasting 3 years of net profits discounted using an 
interest rate of 14.0% per annum. The range of contingent consideration payable is £nil to £2,500,000. 

See note 6 for the fair value of the Contingent Consideration at 31 December 2021. 

Page | 67  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

32.  Acquisition of non-controlling interest 
On  14  June  2021,  the  Group  increased  its  shareholding  in  NRFL  to  90%  (30  June  and  31  December  2020:  75%)  for  a  cash 
consideration of £310,000.  

The carrying value of non-controlling interest acquired at the date of acquisition was £44,000. The consideration in excess of the 
carrying amount of £266,000 has been charged directly to the profit and loss account. 

33.  Acquisition of financial instrument 
On 9 June 2021 the Group acquired 10% of the issued share capital of RFG for nil consideration. The receipt of the issued share 
capital is considered to be a commitment fee receivable by the Group in order to originate loan facilities in aggregate not exceeding 
£6,250,000 to RFG. The commitment fee is an integral part of the effective interest rate of the associated loan facilities issued to 
RFG.  

The Group is not considered to have a significant influence over RFG as it holds less than a 20% shareholding and is not considered 
to participate in the policy making decisions of the entity. The 10% shareholding has thus been classified as a financial instrument. 

The Group continues to obtain information necessary to measure the fair value of the shares obtained. The fair value of the financial 
instrument received has been determined as £68,000 at initial recognition based on the proportionate share of the net asset value of 
RFG. There has been no change to fair value at year-end. 

As part of the transaction, the Group has been granted two warrants to acquire further shares. The first warrant is for 5% of the share 
capital and the second warrant is for a further 5% of the share capital.  

The two warrants are exercisable dependent upon the Group’s banking subsidiary, the Bank, contracting with RFG, for a larger facility. 
The fair value of the two warrants has been determined to be nil due to the significant uncertainty that exists at acquisition date and 
the period end in issuing a further debt facility. 

34.  Goodwill 

Cash generating unit 

EAL 
BLX 
BBSL 
NRFL 
Manx Collections Limited (“MCL”) 
Three Spires Insurance Services Limited (“Three Spires”) 

Group 
2021 
£000 

1,849 
1,908 
1,390 
678 
454 
41 
6,320 

Group 
2020 
£000 

1,849 
- 
1,390 
678 
454 
41 
4,412 

The  goodwill  is  considered  to  have an  indefinite  life  and  is reviewed on  an  annual  basis by  comparing  its  estimated  recoverable 
amount with its carrying value. The key assumptions used in the estimation of the recoverable amount are set out in this note. The 
recoverable amount of the CGUs discussed in this note were each based on value in use. The values assigned to key assumptions 
represents management’s assessment of future trends in the relevant industries and have been based on historical data from both 
external and internal sources. 

The estimated recoverable amount in relation to the EAL CGU (including also goodwill generated on acquisition of EAL) is based on 
the forecasted 3 year cash flow projections, extrapolated to 10 years using a 2.0% annual increment, and then discounted using a 
11.0% discount factor. The sensitivity of the analysis was tested using additional discount factors of 15.0% and 20.0% on stable profit 
levels. 

The estimated recoverable amount in relation to the goodwill generated on the purchase of BLX is based on forecasted 3 year interest 
income  calculated  at  an  average  yield  of  8%,  with  a  terminal  value  calculated  using  a  3.0%  growth  rate  of  net  income  and  then 
discounted using a 14.0% discount factor. The sensitivity of the analysis was tested using additional discount factors of up to 20.0% 
on varying interest income growth rates. 

The estimated  recoverable amount  in  relation  to  the goodwill  generated  on  the  purchase  of  BBSL  is based on forecasted  3 year 
interest income calculated at an average yield of 8%, with a terminal value calculated using a 3.0% growth rate of net income and 
then discounted using a 14.0% discount factor. The sensitivity of the analysis was tested using additional discount factors of up to 
20.0% on varying interest income growth rates. 

The estimated recoverable amount in relation to the goodwill generated on the purchase of NRFL is based on a 4 year sales forecast, 
extrapolated to 14 years using a 1.5% annual increment, and then discounted using a 12% discount factor. The sensitivity of  the 
analysis was tested using additional discount factors of up to 20.0% on varying sales volumes. On the basis of the above reviews no 
impairment to goodwill has been made in the current year. 

Page | 68  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

34.  Goodwill (continued) 
The estimated recoverable amount in relation to the goodwill generated on the purchase of MCL is based on forecasted 3-year sales 
interest income calculated at 5.0% margin, extrapolated to 10 years using a 2.0% annual increment, and then discounted using a 
11.0% discount factor. The sensitivity of the analysis was tested using additional discount factors of 15.0% and 20.0% on varying 
sales volumes.  

The goodwill generated on the purchase of Three Spires has been reviewed at the current year end and is considered adequate given 
its income streams referred to EAL.  Based on the above reviews no impairment to goodwill has been made in the current year. 

35.  Investment in Group undertakings 
Amounts owed to Group undertakings 
Amounts owed to Group undertakings are unsecured, interest-free and repayable on demand. 

Subordinated loans 
MFG has issued several subordinated loans as part of its equity funding into the Bank and EAL. 

Creation 

Maturity 

Interest rate
% p.a.

Conister Bank Limited 
11 February 2014 
27 May 2014 
9 July 2014 
17 September 2014 
22 July 2013 
25 October 2013 
23 September 2016 
14 June 2017 
12 June 2018 

11 February 2024 
27 May 2024 
9 July 2024 
17 September 2026 
22 July 2033 
22 October 2033 
23 September 2036 
14 June 2037 
12 June 2038 

Edgewater Associates Limited 
21 February 2017 
14 May 2017 

21 February 2027 
14 May 2027 

7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0

7.0
7.0

2021 
£000 

500 
500 
500 
400 
1,000 
1,000 
1,100 
450 
2,000 

150 
128 
7,728 

2020 
£000 

500 
500 
500 
400 
1,000 
1,000 
1,100 
450 
2,000 

150 
128 
7,728 

36.  Related party transactions 
Cash deposits 
During the year, the Bank held cash on deposit on behalf of Jim Mellon (Executive Chairman of MFG). At 31 December total deposits 
amounted to £507,908 (2020: £432,213), at normal commercial interest rates in accordance with the standard rates offered by the 
Bank.  

At 31 December, the Bank held cash on deposit on behalf of David Gibson (Non-executive Director of the Bank and MFG) of £nil (2020: 
£50,282). 

Staff and commercial loans 
Details of staff loans are given in note 20. 

Commercial loans have been made to various companies connected to Jim Mellon and Denham Eke on normal commercial terms. 
As at 31 December 2021, £nil of capital and interest was outstanding (2020: £23,742). 

Intercompany recharges 
Various  intercompany  recharges  are  made  during  the  course  of  the  year  as  a  result  of  the  Bank  settling  debts  in  other  Group 
companies. EAL provides services to the Group in arranging its insurance and defined contribution pension arrangements. 

Page | 69  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

36.  Related party transactions (continued) 

Loan advance to EAL 
On 14 December 2016, a loan advance was made to EAL by the Bank in order to provide the finance required to acquire MBL.  The 
advance was for £700,000 at an interest rate of 8% per annum repayable over 6 years.  A negative pledge was given by EAL to not 
encumber any property or assets or enter into an arrangement to borrow any further monies. The balance as at 31 December 2021 
was £140,950 (2020: £273,568). 

Loan advance to PIML 
On 24 May 2018, a £500,000 loan facility was made available to PIML by the Bank in order to provide the finance required to expand 
its operations. The facility is for 12 months. Interest is charged at commercial rates. During the year, the facility was increased to 
£1,219,000. At 31 December 2021, £1,219,000 (2020: £685,000) had been advanced to PIML.  

Subordinated loans 

The Company has advanced £7,450,000 (2020: £7,450,000) of subordinated loans to the Bank and £278,000 (2020: £278,000) to 
EAL as at 31 December 2021. See note 33 for more details. 

Loan notes 
See note 26 for a list of related party loan notes as at 31 December 2021 and 2020. 

Key management remuneration including Executive Directors 

Short-term employee benefits 

2021 
£000 

1,098 

2020 
£000 

1,120 

37.  Leases 
A. Leases as lessee 
The Group leases the head office building in the Isle of Man. The leases typically run for a period of 10 years with an option to renew 
the lease after that date. Lease payments are renegotiated every 10 years to reflect market rentals. 

The Group leases an office unit in the United Kingdom and IT equipment with contract terms of 2 to 3 years. These leases are short-
term and/or leases of low-value items. The Group has elected not to recognise right-of-use assets and lease liabilities for these leases. 

Information about leases for which the Group is a lessee is presented below. 

i. Right-of-use assets 

Right-of-use assets related to leased properties that do not meet the definition of investment property are presented as property, plant 
and equipment. 

Group 

Cost 
As at 1 January 2021 

Additions 
Disposals 
As at 31 December 2021 

Accumulated depreciation 
As at 1 January 2021 

Charge for the year 
Eliminated on disposals 
As at 31 December 2021 

Carrying value at 31 December 2021 

Carrying value at 31 December 2020 

Land and 
Buildings 
£000 

737 
993 
(285) 
1,445 

329 
162 
(285) 
206 

1,239 

408 

Total 
£000 

737 
993 
(285) 
1,445 

329 
162 
(285) 
206 

1,239 

408 

Page | 70  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

37.  Leases (continued) 

ii. Amounts recognised in profit or loss 

Interest on lease liabilities 
Depreciation expense 
Expenses relating to short-term leases and low-value assets 

iii. Amounts recognised in statement of cash flows 

Total cash outflow for leases 

iv. Non-cancellable operating lease rentals are payable in respect of property as follows: 

Less than one year 
Between one and five years 
Over five years 
Total operating lease rentals payable 

2021 
£000 

42 
162 
64 

2021 
£000 

243 

2021 
£000 

64 
128 
- 
192 

2020 
£000 

40 
164 
97 

2020 
£000 

244 

2020 
£000 

84 
- 
- 
84 

38.  Regulators 
Certain Group subsidiaries are regulated by the FSA and the FCA as detailed below. 

The Bank and EAL are regulated by the FSA under a Class 1(1) - Deposit Taking licence and Class 2 - Investment Business licence 
respectively. The Bank and CFL are regulated by the FCA to provide regulated products and services. 

39.  Contingent liabilities 
The Bank is required to be a member of the Isle of Man Government Depositors’ Compensation Scheme which was introduced by 
the Isle of Man Government under the Banking Business (Compensation of Depositors) Regulations 1991 and creates a liability on 
the Bank to participate in the compensation of depositors should it be activated. 

40.  Subsequent events 
There were no subsequent events occurring after 31 December 2021.  

Page | 71  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

41.  Financial risk management 
A. Introduction and overview 
The Group has exposure to the following risks from financial instruments: 

 
credit risk; 
 
liquidity risk; 
  market risk; and 
 
operational risk. 

Risk management framework 
The Board has overall responsibility for the establishment and oversight of the Group’s risk management framework. The Board has 
established the ARCC, which is responsible for approving and monitoring Group risk management policies. The ARCC is assisted in 
its  oversight  role  by  Internal  Audit.  Internal  Audit  undertakes  both  regular  and  ad  hoc  reviews  of  risk  management  controls  and 
procedures, the results of which are reported to the ARCC. 

The Group’s risk management policies are established to identify and analyse the risks faced by the Group, to set appropriate risk 
limits and controls, and to monitor risks and adherence to limits. The risk management policies and systems are reviewed regularly 
to reflect changes in market conditions and the Group’s activities. The Group, though its training and management standards and 
procedures, aims to develop a disciplined and constructive control environment in which all employees understand their roles and 
obligations. 

B. Credit risk 
Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer or counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its contractual 
obligations,  and  arises principally  from the  Group’s  loans  and  advances  to  customers  and  investment  debt  securities. Credit  risk 
includes counterparty, concentration, underwriting and credit mitigation risks.  

Management of credit risk 
The Bank’s Board of Directors created the Credit Committee which is responsible for managing credit risk, including the following: 

 

Formulating credit policies in consultation with business units, covering collateral requirements, credit assessments, risk 
grading and reporting, documentary and legal procedures, and compliance with regulatory and statutory requirements; 
  Establishing the authorisation structure for the approval and renewal of credit facilities. Authorisation limits are allocated to 

in line with credit policy; 

  Reviewing and assessing credit risk: The Credit Committee assesses all credit exposures in excess of designated limits, 
before facilities are committed to customers. Renewals and reviews of facilities are subject to the same review process. 
Limiting concentrations of  exposures to counterparties, geographies and industries, by issuer, credit rating band, market 
liquidity and country (for debt securities); 

 

  Developing and maintaining risk gradings to categorise exposures according to the degree of risk of default. The current risk 

grading consists of 3 grades reflecting varying degrees of risk of default; 

  Developing and maintaining the Group’s process for measuring ECL: This includes processes for: 

o 
o 
o 

initial approval, regular validation and back-testing of the models used;  
determining and monitoring significant increase in credit risk; and  
incorporation of forward-looking information; and 

  Reviewing compliance with agreed exposure limits. Regular reports on the credit quality of portfolios are provided to the 

Credit Committee which may require corrective action to be taken.  

C. Liquidity risk 
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will encounter difficulty in meeting obligations associated with its financial liabilities that are 
settled by delivering cash or another financial asset. Liquidity risk arises from mismatches in the timing and amounts of cash flows, 
which is inherent to the Group’s operations and investments. 

Management of liquidity risk 
The  Group’s  approach  to  managing  liquidity  is  to  ensure,  as  far  as  possible,  that  it  will  always  have  enough  liquidity  to  meet  its 
liabilities when they are due, under both normal and stressed conditions, without incurring unacceptable losses or risking damage to 
the Group’s reputation. The key elements of the Group’s liquidity strategy are as follows: 

 

 

Funding base: offering six-months to five-year fixed term deposit structure with no early redemption option. This means the 
Bank is not subject to optionality risk where customers redeem fixed rate products where there may be a better rate available 
within the market;  
Funding profile: the Bank has a matched funding profile and does not engage in maturity transformation which means that 
on a cumulative mismatch position the Bank is forecast to be able to meet all liabilities as they fall due; 

Page | 72  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

41.  Financial risk management (continued) 
C. Liquidity risk (continued) 
Management of liquidity risk (continued) 

 

  Monitoring maturity mismatches, behavioural characteristics of the Group’s financial assets and financial liabilities, and the 
extent to which the Group’s assets are encumbered and so not available as potential collateral for obtaining funding;  
Liquidity buffer: the Bank maintains a liquidity buffer of 10.0% of its deposit liabilities, with strict short-term mismatch limits 
of 0.0% for sight to three months and -5.0% for sight to six months. This ensures that the Bank is able to withstand any short-
term liquidity shock; and 
Interbank market: the Bank has no exposure to the interbank lending market. The Bank has no reliance on liquidity via the 
wholesale markets. In turn, if market conditions meant access to the wholesale funding was constrained as per the 2008 
credit crisis, this would have no foreseeable effect on the Bank.  

 

The Bank’s liquidity position is monitored daily against internal and external limits agreed with the FSA and according to the Bank’s 
Liquidity Policy. The Bank also has a Liquidity Contingency Policy and Liquidity Contingency Committee in the event of a liquidity 
crisis or potential liquidity disruption event occurring. 

The Treasury department receives information from other business units regarding the liquidity profile of their financial assets and 
financial liabilities and details of other projected cash flows arising from projected future business. Treasury then maintains a portfolio 
of short-term liquid assets, largely made up of short-term liquid investment securities, loans and advances to banks and other inter-
bank facilities, to ensure that sufficient liquidity is maintained within the Group as a whole. 

Regular liquidity stress testing is conducted under a variety of scenarios covering both normal and more severe market conditions. 
The scenarios are developed considering both Group-specific events and market-related events (e.g. prolonged market illiquidity). 

D. Market risk 
Market risk is the risk that changes in market prices; e.g. interest rates, equity prices, foreign exchange rates and credit spreads (not 
relating  to  changes  in  the  obligor’s/issuer’s  credit  standing),  will  affect  the  Group’s  income  or  value  of  its  holdings  of  financial 
instruments. The objective of the Group’s market risk management is to manage and control market risk exposures within acceptable 
parameters to ensure the Group’s solvency while optimising the return on risk. 

Management of market risks 
Overall authority for market risk is vested in the Assets and Liabilities Committee (“ALCO”) which sets up limits for each type of risk. 
Group finance is responsible for the development of risk management policies (subject to review and approval by the ALCO) and for 
the day-to-day review of their implementation. 

Foreign exchange risk 
The Bank is not subject to foreign exchange risks and its business is conducted in pounds sterling. 

Equity risk 
The Group has investment in associates which are carried at cost adjusted for the Group’s share of net asset value. The Bank has 
access to  these accounts. The Bank’s exposure to  market risk is not considered significant given the low carrying amount of  the 
investment. 

The Group’s does not hold any investments in listed equities.  

Interest rate risk 
The principal potential interest rate risk that the Bank is exposed to is the risk that the fixed interest rate and term profile of its deposit 
base differs materially from the fixed interest rate and term profile of its asset base, or basis and term structure risk.  

Additional interest rate risk may arise for banks where (a) customers are able to react to market sensitivity and redeem fixed rate 
products and (b) where a bank has taken out interest rate derivate hedges especially against longer-term interest rate risk, where the 
hedge moves against the bank. However, neither of these risks apply to the Bank. 

Interest rate risk for the Bank is not deemed to be currently material due to the Bank’s matched funding profile. Any interest rate risk 
assumed by the Bank will arise from a reduction in interest rates, in a rising environment due to the nature of the Bank’s products and 
its matched funded profile. The Bank should be able to increase its lending rate to match any corresponding rise in its cost of funds, 
notwithstanding  its  inability  to vary  rates  on  its  existing  loan  book.  The  Bank  attempts  to efficiently  match  its  deposit  taking  to  its 
funding requirements. 

Page | 73  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

41.  Financial risk management (continued) 
E. Operational risk 
Operational  risk  is  the  risk  of direct  or  indirect  loss  arising  from a  wide  variety  of  causes associated  with  the  Group’s processes, 
personnel, technology and infrastructure, and from external factors other than credit, market and liquidity risks – e.g. those arising 
from legal and regulatory requirements and generally accepted standards of corporate behaviour. Operational risks arise from all of 
the Group’s operations. 

Management of operational risk 
The Group’s objective is to manage operational risk so as to balance the avoidance of financial losses and damage to the Group’s 
reputation with overall cost effectiveness and innovation. In all cases, Group policy requires compliance with all applicable legal and 
regulatory requirements. 

The Group has developed standards for the management of operational risk in the following areas: 

  Business continuity planning; 
  Requirements for appropriate segregation of duties, including the independent authorisation of transactions; 
  Requirements for the reconciliation and monitoring of transactions; 
  Compliance with regulatory and other legal requirements; 
  Documentation of controls and procedures; 
  Periodic assessment of operational risks faced, and the adequacy of controls and procedures to address the risks identified; 
  Requirements for the reporting of operational losses and proposed remedial action; 
  Development of contingency plans; 
 
  Ethical and business standards; 
 
  Risk mitigation, including insurance where this is cost-effective. 

Information technology and cyber risks; and  

Training and professional development; 

Compliance  with  Group standards  is  supported  by  a  programme  of  periodic  reviews  undertaken  by  Internal  Audit.  The  results  of 
Internal Audit reviews are reported to the ARCC. 

42.  Basis of measurement 
The financial statements are prepared on a historical cost basis, except for the following material items: 

Items 

Measurement basis 

FVTPL – Trading asset 
FVOCI – Debt securities 
Net defined benefit liability 

Fair value 
Fair value 
Fair  value  of  plan  assets  less  the  present  value  of  the 
defined benefit obligation 

Page | 74  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

43.  Significant accounting policies 
A number of new standards have been effective from 1 January 2021 but they do not have a material effect on the Group’s financial 
statements. 

The Group has consistently applied the following accounting policies to all periods presented in these financial statements.  

Set out below is an index of the significant accounting policies, the details of which are available on the pages that follow: 

Ref. 

Note description 

A. 
B.  
C. 
D.  
E. 
F. 
G. 
H. 
I. 
J. 
K. 
L. 
M. 
N. 
O. 
P. 
Q. 

Basis of consolidation of subsidiaries and separate financial statements of the Company 
Interest in equity accounted investees 
Interest 
Fee and commission income 
Leases 
Income tax 
Financial assets and financial liabilities 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Loans and advances 
Property, plant and equipment 
Intangibles assets and goodwill 
Impairment of non-financial assets 
Deposits, debt securities issued and subordinated liabilities 
Employee benefits 
Share capital and reserves 
Earnings per share (“EPS”) 
Segmental reporting 

No. 

76 
76 
76 
77 
77 
78 
79 
83 
83 
83 
83 
84 
85 
85 
85 
85 
86 

Page | 75  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

43.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

A. Basis of consolidation of subsidiaries and separate financial statements of the Company 
i. Business combinations 
The  Group  accounts  for  business  combinations  using  the  acquisition  method  when  control  is  transferred  to  the  Group.  The 
consideration transferred in the acquisition is generally measured at fair value, as are the identifiable net assets acquired. Any goodwill 
that arises is tested annually for impairment. Any gain on a bargain purchase is recognised in profit or loss immediately. Transaction 
costs are expensed as incurred, except if they are related to issue of debt or equity securities. 

ii. Subsidiaries 
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. The Group controls an entity if it is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from 
its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its control over the entity. The Group reassesses 
whether it has control if there are changes to one or more of the elements of control. This includes circumstances in which protective 
rights held (e.g. those resulting from a lending relationship) become substantive and lead to the Group having power over an investee. 
The  financial  statements  of  subsidiaries  are  included  in  the  consolidated  financial  statements  from  the  date  on  which  control 
commences until the date on which control ceases. 

iii. Non-controlling interests (“NCI”) 
NCI are measured initially at their proportionate share of the acquiree’s identifiable net assets at the date of acquisition. 

Changes in the Group’s interest in a subsidiary that do not result in a loss of control are accounted for as equity transactions. 

iv. Loss of control 
When the Group loses control over a subsidiary, it derecognises the assets and liabilities of the subsidiary, and any related NCI and 
other components of equity. Any resulting gain or loss is recognised in profit or loss. Any interest retained in the former subsidiary is 
measured at fair value when control is lost.  

v. Transactions eliminated on consolidation 
Intra-group balances and transactions, and any unrealised income and expenses arising from intra-group transactions, are eliminated 
in preparing the consolidated financial statements. Unrealised losses are eliminated in the same way as unrealised gains, but only to 
the extent that there is no evidence of impairment. 

vi. Separate financial statements of the Company 
In the separate financial statements of the Company, interests in subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures are accounted for at cost. 

B. Interests in equity accounted investees 
The Group’s interests in equity accounted investees may comprise interests in associates and joint ventures. 

Associates  are  those  entities  in  which  the  Group  has  significant  influence,  but  not  control  or  joint  control,  over  the  financial  and 
operating policies. A joint venture is an arrangement in which the Group has joint control, whereby the Group has rights to the net 
assets of the arrangement, rather than rights to its assets and obligations for its liabilities.  

Interests  in  associates and  joint  ventures  are  accounted  for  using  the  equity method.  They  are  initially  recognised  at  cost,  which 
includes transaction costs. Subsequent to initial recognition, the consolidated financial statements include the Group’s share of the 
profit or loss and OCI of equity accounted investees, until the date on which significant influence or joint control ceases. 

C. Interest  
Interest income and expense are recognised in profit or loss using the effective interest rate method.  

i. Effective interest rate 
The effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash payments or receipts of the financial instrument to 
the gross carrying amount of the financial asset or amortised cost of the financial liability. When calculating the effective interest rate 
for financial assets, the Group estimates future cash flows considering all contractual terms of the financial instruments, including 
origination fees, loan incentives, broker fees payable, estimated early repayment charges, balloon payments and all other premiums 
and discounts. It also includes direct incremental transaction costs related to the acquisition or issue of the financial instrument. The 
calculation does not consider future credit losses. 

ii. Amortised cost and gross carrying amount 
The amortised cost of a financial asset or financial liability is the amount at which the financial asset or financial liability is measured 
on initial recognition minus the principal repayments, plus or minus the cumulative amortisation using the effective interest method of 
any difference between that initial amount and the maturity amount and, for financial assets, adjusted for any expected credit loss 
allowance.  

Page | 76  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

43.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

C. Interest (continued) 
ii. Amortised cost and gross carrying amount (continued) 
The gross carrying amount of a financial asset is the amortised cost of a financial asset before adjusting for any expected credit loss 
allowance. 

iii. Calculation of interest income and expense 
In calculating interest income and expense, the effective interest rate is applied to the gross carrying amount of the asset (when the 
asset is not credit-impaired) or to the amortised cost of the liability. 

However,  for  financial  assets that have become credit-impaired subsequent to  initial recognition,  interest income  is calculated by 
applying  the  effective  interest  rate  to  the  amortised  cost  of  the  financial  asset.  If  the  asset  is  no  longer  credit-impaired,  then  the 
calculation of interest income reverts to the gross basis. 

D. Fee and commission income 
The Group generates fee and commission income through provision of independent financial advice, insurance brokerage agency, 
introducer of foreign exchange services and commissions from brokering business finance for small and medium sized enterprises.  

Independent financial advice and insurance brokerage agency 
Income represents commission arising on services and premiums relating to policies and other investment products committed during 
the year, as well as renewal commissions having arisen on services and premiums relating to policies and other investment products 
committed during the year and previous years and effective at the balance sheet date. Income is recognised on the date that policies 
are submitted to product providers with an appropriate discount being applied for policies not completed. As a way to estimate what 
is  due  at  the year-end,  a  “not  proceeded  with”  rate  of  10.0%  for  pipeline  life  insurance  products  and  0.0%  for  non-life insurance 
pipeline is assumed. Renewal commissions are estimated by taking the historical amount written pro-rata to 3 months.  

Other 
Income other than that directly related to the loans is recognised over the period for which service has been provided or on completion 
of an act to which the fee relates.  

E. Leases 
At inception of a contract, the Group assesses whether a contract is, or contains, a lease. A contract is, or contains, a lease if the 
contract coveys the right to control the use of an identified asset for a period of time in exchange for consideration. 

i. As a lessee 
At commencement or on modification of a contract that contains a lease component, the Group allocates the consideration in the 
contract to each lease component on the basis of its relative stand-alone prices. However, for the leases of property the Group has 
elected not to separate non-lease components and as a result, accounts for the lease and non-lease components as a single lease 
component. 

The Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a lease liability at the lease commencement date. The right-of-use asset is initially 
measured at cost, which comprises the initial amount of the lease liability adjusted for any lease payments made at or before the 
commencement date, plus any initial direct costs incurred and an estimate of costs to dismantle and remove the underlying asset or 
to restore the underlying asset or the site on which it is located, less any lease incentives received. 

The right-of-use asset is subsequently depreciated using the straight-line method from the commencement date to the end of the 
lease term, unless the lease transfers ownership of the underlying asset to the Group by the end of the lease term or the cost of the 
right-of-use asset reflects that the Group will exercise a purchase option. In that case the right-of-use asset will be depreciated over 
the useful life of the underlying asset, which is determined on the same basis as those of property and equipment. In addition, the 
right-of-use asset is periodically reduced by impairment losses, if any, and adjusted for certain remeasurements of the lease liability. 

The  lease  liability  is  initially  measured  at  the  present  value of  the  lease  payments  that  are  not  paid  at  the  commencement  date, 
discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease or, if that rate cannot be readily determined, the Group’s incremental borrowing 
rate. Generally, the Group uses its incremental borrowing rate as the discount rate. 

The Group determines its incremental borrowing rate by obtaining interest rates from various external financing sources and makes 
certain adjustments to reflect the terms of the lease and the type of the asset leased. 

Page | 77  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

43.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

E. Leases (continued) 
i. As a lessee (continued) 
Lease payments included in the measurement of the lease liability comprise the following: 

Fixed payments, including in-substance fixed payments; 

 
  Variable  lease  payments  that  depend  on  an  index  or  a  rate,  initially  measured  using  the  index  or  rate  as  at  the 

commencement date; 

  Amounts expected to be payable under a residual value guarantee; and 
 

The exercise price under a purchase option that the Group is reasonably certain to exercise, lease payments in an optional 
renewal period if the Group is reasonably certain to exercise an extension option, and penalties for early termination of a 
lease unless the Group is reasonably certain not to terminate early. 

The lease liability is measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. It is remeasured when there is a change in future 
lease payments arising from a change in an index or rate, if there is a change in the Group’s estimate of the amount expected to be 
payable under a residual value guarantee, if the Group changes its assessment of whether it will exercise a purchase, extension or 
termination option or if there is a revised in-substance fixed lease payment. 

When the lease liability is remeasured in this way, a corresponding adjustment is made to the carrying amount of the right-of-use 
asset, or is recorded in profit or loss if the carrying amount of the right-of-use asset has been reduced to zero. 

The Group presents right-of-use assets that do not meet the definition of investment property in ‘property, plant and equipment’ and 
lease liabilities in ‘loans and borrowings’ in the statement of financial position. 

Short-term leases and leases of low-value assets 
The Group has elected not to recognise right-of-use assets and lease liabilities for leases of low-value assets and short-term leases, 
including IT equipment. The Group recognises the lease payments associated with these leases as an expense on a straight-line 
basis over the lease term.  

ii. As a lessor 
At inception or on modification of a contract that contains a lease component, the Group allocates the consideration in the contract to 
each lease component on the basis of their relative stand-alone prices. 

When the Group acts as a lessor, it determines at lease inception whether each lease is a finance or an operating lease. 

To  classify  each  lease,  the  Group  makes  an  overall  assessment  of  whether  the  lease  transfers  substantially  all  of  the  risks  and 
rewards  incidental  to  ownership  of  the  underlying  asset.  If  this  is  the case,  then  the  lease  is  a  finance  lease;  if  not,  then  it  is  an 
operating lease. As part of this assessment, the Group considers certain indicators such as whether the lease is for the major part of 
the economic life of the asset. 

Finance leases and HP contracts  
When assets are subject to a finance lease or HP contract, the present value of the lease payments is recognised as a receivable. 
The difference between the gross receivable and the present value of the receivable is recognised as unearned finance income. HP 
and lease income is recognised over the term of the contract or lease reflecting a constant periodic rate of return on the net investment 
in the contract or lease. Initial direct costs, which may include commissions and legal fees directly attributable to negotiating and 
arranging the contract or lease, are included in the measurement of the net investment of the contract or lease at inception.  

Operating leases  
Leases in which a significant portion of the risks and rewards of  ownership are retained by the lessor are classified as operating 
leases. Payments made under operating leases (net of any incentives received from the lessor) are charged to profit or loss and other 
comprehensive income on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease. 

F. Income tax 
Current and deferred taxation 
Current taxation relates to the estimated corporation tax payable in the current financial year.  Deferred taxation is provided in full, 
using the liability method, on timing differences arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in 
the consolidated financial statements. Deferred tax is not recognised for taxable temporary differences arising on the initial recognition 
of goodwill and temporary differences related to investments in subsidiaries and associates to the extent that the Group is able to 
control the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences and it is probable that they will not reverse in the foreseeable future. 

Deferred taxation is determined using tax rates, and laws that have been enacted or substantially enacted by the reporting date and 
are expected to apply when the related deferred tax is realised. Deferred taxation assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable 
that future taxable profit will be available against which the temporary differences can be utilised.  

Page | 78  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

43.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

G. Financial assets and financial liabilities 
i. Recognition and initial measurement 
The Group initially recognises loans and advances, deposits, debt securities issued and subordinated liabilities on the date on which 
they are originated. All other financial instruments including regular-way purchases and sales of financial assets are recognised on 
the trade date, which is the date on which the Group becomes party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. 

A financial asset or financial liability is measured initially at fair value plus, for an item not at FVTPL, transaction costs that are directly 
attributable to its acquisition or issue. 

ii. Classification 
Financial assets 
On initial recognition, a financial asset is classified as measured at amortised cost, FVOCI or FVTPL. 

A financial asset is measured at amortised cost if it meets both of the following conditions and is not designated as at FVTPL: 

 
 

The asset is held within a business model whose objective is to hold assets to collect contractual cash flows; and 
The contractual terms of the financial asset give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are solely payments of principal 
and interest (“SPPI”). 

A debt instrument is measured at FVOCI only if it meets both of the following conditions and is not designated as FVTPL: 

 

 

The asset is held within a business model whose objective is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and selling 
financial assets; and 
The contractual terms of the financial asset give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are SPPI. 

On  initial  recognition  of  an  equity  investment  that  is  not  held  for  trading,  the  Group  may  irrevocably  elect  to  present  subsequent 
changes in fair value in OCI. This election is made on an investment-by-investment basis. 

All other financial assets are classified as measured at FVTPL. 

In addition, on initial recognition, the Group may irrevocably designate a financial asset that otherwise meets the requirements to be 
measured at amortised cost or at FVOCI as at FVTPL if doing so eliminates or significantly reduces an accounting mismatch that 
would otherwise arise. 

Business model assessment 
The Group makes an assessment of the objective of a business model in which an asset is held at a portfolio level because this best 
reflects the way the business is managed and information provided to management. 

Assessment of whether contractual cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest 
For the purposes of this assessment, ‘principal’ is defined as the fair value of the financial asset on initial recognition. ‘Interest’ is 
defined as consideration for the time value of money and for the credit risk associated with the principal amount outstanding during a 
particular period of time and for other basic lending risks and costs (e.g. liquidity risk and administrative costs), as well as profit margin. 
In assessing whether the contractual cash flows are SPPI, the Group considers the contractual terms of the instrument. This includes 
assessing whether the financial asset contains a contractual term that could change the timing or amount of contractual cash flows 
such that it would not meet this condition. 

Reclassifications 
Financial assets are not reclassified subsequent to their initial recognition, except in the period after the Group changes its business 
model for managing financial assets. 

Financial liabilities  
The Group classifies its financial liabilities, other than financial guarantees and loan commitments, as measured at amortised cost. 

iii. Derecognition 
Financial assets 
The Group derecognises a financial asset when the contractual rights to the cash flows from the financial asset expire, or when it 
transfers the rights to receive the contractual cash flows in a transaction in which substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership 
of the financial asset are transferred or in which the Group neither transfers nor retains substantially all of the risks and rewards of 
ownership and it does not retain control of the financial asset. 

Page | 79  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

43.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

G. Financial assets and financial liabilities (continued) 
iii. Derecognition (continued) 
Financial assets (continued) 
On derecognition of a financial asset, the difference between the carrying amount of the asset (or the carrying amount allocated to 
the portion of the asset derecognised) and the sum of (i) the consideration received (including any new asset obtained less any new 
liability assumed) and (ii) any cumulative gain or loss that had been recognised in OCI is recognised in profit or loss. 

Financial liabilities 
The Group derecognises a financial liability when its contractual obligations are discharged or cancelled, or expire. 

iv. Modifications of financial assets and financial liabilities 
Financial assets  
If the terms of a financial asset are modified, then the Group evaluates whether the cash flows of the modified asset are substantially 
different.  

If the cash flows are substantially different, the contractual rights to cash flows from the original financial asset are deemed to have 
expired. In this case, the original financial asset is derecognised and a new financial asset is recognised at fair value plus any eligible 
transaction costs. 

If the cash flows are modified when the borrower is in financial difficulties, then the objective of the modification is usually to maximise 
recovery of the original contractual terms rather than to originate a new asset with substantially different terms. If the Group plans to 
modify a financial asset in a way that would result in forgiveness of cash flows, then it first considers whether a portion of the asset 
should be written off before the modification takes place. This approach impacts the result of the quantitative evaluation and means 
that the derecognition criteria are not usually met in such cases. 

If the modification of a financial asset measured at amortised cost or FVOCI does not result in derecognition of the financial asset, 
then the Group first recalculates the gross carrying amount of the financial asset using the original effective interest rate of the asset 
and recognises the resulting adjustment as a modification gain or loss in profit or loss. Any costs or fees incurred and fees received 
as part of the modification adjust the gross carrying amount of the modified financial asset and are amortised over the remaining term 
of the modified financial asset. If such modification is carried out because of financial difficulties of the borrower, then the gain or loss 
is presented together with impairment losses. In other cases, it is presented as interest income calculated using the effective interest 
rate method. 

Financial liabilities 
The Group derecognises a financial liability when its terms are modified and the cash flows of the modified liability are substantially 
different. In this case, a new financial liability based on the modified terms is recognised at fair value. The difference between the 
carrying  amount  of  the  financial  liability  derecognised  and  consideration  paid  is  recognised  in  profit  or  loss.  Consideration  paid 
includes non-financial assets transferred, if any, and the assumption of liabilities, including the new modified financial liability. 

If the modification of a financial liability is not accounted for as derecognition, then the amortised cost of the liability is recalculated by 
discounting the modified cash flows at the original effective interest rate and the resulting gain or losses recognised in profit or loss. 
Any costs and fee incurred are recognised as an adjustment of the carrying amount of the liability and amortised over the remaining 
term of the modified financial liability by re-computing the effective interest rate on the instrument. 

v. Offsetting 
Financial assets and financial liabilities are offset and the net amount presented in the statement of financial position when, and only 
when, the Group currently has a legally enforceable right to set off the amounts and it intends either to settle them on a net basis or 
to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. 

Income and expenses are presented on a net basis only when permitted under IFRS, or for gains and losses arising from a group of 
similar transactions such as in the Group’s trading activity. 

vi. Fair value measurement 
Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market 
participants at the measurement date in the principal or, in its absence, the most advantageous market to which the Group has access 
at the date. The fair value of a liability reflects its non-performance risk. 

The  Group  recognises  transfers  between  levels  of  the  fair value  hierarchy as of  the  end of  the  reporting period  during which  the 
change has occurred. 

Page | 80  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

43.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

G. Financial assets and financial liabilities (continued) 
vi. Fair value measurement (continued) 
The Group measures fair values using the following fair value hierarchy, which reflects the significance of the inputs used in making 
the measurements:  
  Level 1: inputs that are quoted market prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical instruments; 
  Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. 
derived  from  prices).  This  category  includes  instruments  valued  using:  quoted  market  prices  in  active  markets  for  similar 
instruments; quoted prices for identical or similar instruments in markets that are considered less than active; or other valuation 
techniques in which all significant inputs are directly or indirectly observable from market data; and 

  Level 3: inputs that are unobservable. This category includes all instruments for which the valuation technique includes inputs not 
based  on  observable  data  and  the  unobservable  inputs  have  a  significant  effect  on  the  instrument’s  valuation.  This  category 
includes instruments that are valued based on quoted prices for similar instruments for which significant unobservable adjustments 
or assumptions are required to reflect differences between the instruments. 

The fair values of financial assets and financial liabilities that are traded in active markets are based on quoted market prices or dealer 
price quotations. For all other financial instruments, the Group determines fair values using other valuation techniques. 

For financial instruments that trade infrequently and have little price transparency, fair value is less objective, and requires varying 
degrees  of  judgement  depending  on  liquidity,  concentration,  uncertainty  of  market  factors,  pricing  assumptions  and  other  risks 
affecting the specific instrument.  

vii. Impairment 
A financial instrument that is not credit-impaired on initial recognition is classified in ‘Stage 1’ and has its credit risk continuously monitored by 
the Group.   

If a SICR since initial recognition is identified, the financial instrument is moved to ‘Stage 2’ but is not yet deemed to be credit-impaired.  

  An SICR is always deemed to occur when the borrower is 30 days past due on its contractual payments.  If the Group becomes 
aware ahead of this time of non-compliance or financial difficulties of the borrower, such as loss of employment, avoiding contact 
with the Group then an SICR has also deemed to occur; and  

  A  receivable  is  always  deemed  to  be  in default and credit-impaired  when the  borrower  is  90 days  past  due  on  its  contractual 
payments or earlier if the Group becomes aware of severe financial difficulties such as bankruptcy, individual voluntary arragement, 
abscond or disappearance, fraudulent activity and other similar events.  

If the financial instrument is credit-impaired, the financial instrument is then moved to ‘Stage 3’. Financial instruments in Stage 3 have 
their ECL measured based on expected credit losses on an undiscounted lifetime basis. 

The Group measures loss allowances at an amount equal to lifetime ECL, except for debt investment securities that are determined 
to have low credit risk at the reporting date for which they are measured as a 12-month ECL. Loss allowances for lease receivables 
are always measured at an amount equal to lifetime ECL. 

12-month ECL are the portion of ECL that result from default events on a financial instrument that are possible within the 12 months 
after  the  reporting  date.  Financial  instruments  for  which  a  12-month  ECL  is  recognised  are  referred  to  as  ‘Stage  1  financial 
instruments’. 

Lifetime  ECL  are  the  ECL  that  result  from  all  possible  default  events  over  the  expected  life  of  a  financial  instrument.  Financial 
instruments for which a lifetime ECL is recognised but which are not credit-impaired are referred to as ‘Stage 2 financial instruments’. 

Page | 81  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

43.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

G. Financial assets and financial liabilities (continued) 
vii. Impairment (continued) 

Measurement of ECL 
After a detailed review, the Group devised and implemented an impairment methodology in light of the IFRS 9 requirements outlined 
above noting the following: 

 

 

 

 

The  ECL  was  derived  by  reviewing  the  Group’s  loss  rate  and  loss  given  default  over  the  past  9  years  by  product  and 
geographical segment; 
The Group has assumed that the future economic conditions will broadly mirror the current environment and therefore the 
forecasted loss levels in the next 3 years will match the Group’s experience in recent years; 
For  portfolios  where  the  Group  has  never  had  a  default  in  its  history  or  has  robust  credit  enhancements  such  as  credit 
insurance or default indemnities for the entire portfolio, then no IFRS 9 provision is made.  At 2021 year-end, 28.8% had 
such credit enhancements (2020: 36.6%); and 
If the Group holds objective evidence through specifically assessing a credit-impaired receivable and believes it will go on 
to  completely recover the debt due to the collateral held and cooperation with the borrower,  then no IFRS 9 provision is 
made. 

ECL are probability-weighted estimates of credit losses. They are measured as follows: 

 

 

Financial assets that are not credit-impaired at the reporting date: as the present value of all cash shortfalls (i.e. the difference 
between the cash flows due to the entity in accordance with the contract and the cash flows that the Group expects to receive); 
Financial assets that are credit-impaired at the reporting date: as the difference between the gross carrying amount and the present 
value of estimated future cash flows; and 

  Undrawn loan commitments: as the present value of the difference between the contractual cash flows that are due to the Group if 

the commitment is drawn down and the cash flows that the Group expects to receive. 

Credit-impaired financial assets 
At each reporting date, the Group assesses whether financial assets carried at amortised cost and debt financial assets carried at 
FVOCI, and finance lease receivables are credit-impaired (referred to as ‘Stage 3 financial assets’). A financial asset is credit-impaired 
when one or more events that have a detrimental impact on the estimated future cash flows of the financial asset have occurred. 

Evidence that a financial asset is credit-impaired includes the following observable date: 

  Significant financial difficulty of the borrower or issuer; 
  A breach of contract such as a default or past due event; 
 
 
 

The restructuring of a loan or advance by the Group on terms that the Group would not consider otherwise; 
It is becoming probable that the borrower will enter bankruptcy or other financial reorganisation; or 
The disappearance of an active market for a security because of financial difficulties. 

A loan that has been renegotiated due to a deterioration in the borrower’s condition is usually considered to be credit-impaired unless 
there is evidence that the risk of not receiving contractual cash flows has reduced significantly and there are no other indicators of 
impairment. In  addition,  a  retail  loan  that  is overdue  for  90 days  or more  is considered  credit-impaired even  when  the  regulatory 
definition of default is different. 

In making an assessment of whether an investment in sovereign debt is credit impaired, the Group considers the following factors: 

 
 
 
 

 

The market’s assessment of creditworthiness as reflected in the bond yields; 
The rating agencies’ assessments of creditworthiness; 
The country’s ability to access the capital markets for new debt issuance; 
The  probability  of  debt  being  restructured,  resulting  in  holders  suffering  losses  through  voluntary  or  mandatory  debt 
forgiveness; and 
The international support mechanisms in place to provide the necessary support as ‘lender of last resort’ to that country, as 
well as the intention, reflected in public statements, of governments and agencies to use those mechanisms. This includes 
an assessment of the depth of those mechanisms and, irrespective of the political intent, whether there is the capacity to 
fulfil the required criteria. 

Presentation of allowance for ECL in the statement of financial position 
Loss allowances for ECL are presented in the statement of financial position as follows: 

Financial assets measured at amortised cost: as a deduction from the gross carrying amount of the assets; 
Loan commitments: generally, as a provision; and 

 
 
  Debt instruments measured at FVOCI: no loss allowance is recognised in the statement of financial position because the 
carrying amount of these assets is their fair value. However, the loss allowance is disclosed and is recognised in the fair 
value reserve. 

Page | 82  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

43.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

G. Financial assets and financial liabilities (continued) 
vii. Impairment (continued) 

Write-off 
Loans and debt securities are written off (either partially or in full) when there is no reasonable expectation of recovering a financial 
asset in its entirety or a portion thereof. This is generally the case when the Group determines that the borrower does not have assets 
or sources of income that could generate sufficient cash flows to repay the amounts subject to the write-off. This assessment is carried 
out at the individual asset level. 

Recoveries of amounts previously written off are included in ‘impairment losses on financial instruments’ in the statement of profit or 
loss and OCI. 

Financial assets that are written off could still be subject to enforcement activities in order to comply with the Group’s procedures for 
recovery of amounts due. 

H. Cash and cash equivalents 
For  the purpose  of  the  statement of  cash  flows,  cash  and cash  equivalents  comprise  cash  and  deposit balances  with  an  original 
maturity date of three months or less.  

I. Loans and advances 
Loans and advances’ captions in the statement of financial position include: 

 

 

Loans and advances measured at amortised cost (see note 43 (I)). They are initially measured at fair value plus incremental 
direct transaction costs, and subsequently at their amortised cost using the effective interest method; and 
Finance lease receivables (see note 43 (G)). 

J. Property, plant and equipment  
Items of property, plant and equipment are stated at historical cost less accumulated depreciation (see below). Historical cost includes 
expenditure that is directly attributable to the acquisition of the items.  

The assets’ residual values and useful economic lives are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each reporting date. An asset’s 
carrying amount is written down immediately to its recoverable amount if the asset’s carrying amount is greater than its estimated 
recoverable amount.  

When parts of an item of property, plant and equipment have different useful lives, those components are accounted for as separate 
items of property, plant and equipment.  

Depreciation and amortisation 
Assets are depreciated or amortised on a straight-line basis, so as to write off the book value over their estimated useful lives.  The 
estimated useful lives of property, plant and equipment and intangibles are as follows: 

Property, plant and equipment 
Leasehold improvements 
IT equipment 
Motor vehicles 
Furniture and equipment 
Plant and machinery 

to expiration of the lease 
4 - 5 years 
2 - 5 years 
4 -10 years 
5 – 20 years 

K. Intangible assets and goodwill 
i. Goodwill  
Goodwill that arises on the acquisition of subsidiaries is measured at cost less accumulated impairment losses. 

Page | 83  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

43.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

K. Intangible assets and goodwill (continued) 
ii. Software 
Software acquired by the Group is measured at cost less accumulated amortisation and any accumulated impairment losses.  

Expenditure on internally developed software is recognised as an asset when the Group is able to demonstrate: that the product is 
technically feasible, its intention and ability to complete the development and use the software in a manner that will generate future 
economic  benefits,  and  that  it  can  reliably  measure  the  costs  to  complete  the  development.  The  capitalised  costs  of  internally 
developed  software  include  all  costs  directly  attributable  to  developing  the  software  and  capitalised  borrowing  costs,  and  are 
amortised  over  its  useful  life.  Internally  developed  software  is  stated  at  capitalised  cost  less  accumulated  amortisation  and  any 
accumulated impairment losses. 

Software is amortised on a straight-line basis in profit or loss over its estimated useful life, from the date on which it is available for 
use.  Amortisation methods, useful lives and residual values are reviewed at each reporting date and adjusted if appropriate. 

iii. Other 
Intangible assets that are acquired by an entity and having finite useful lives are measured at cost less accumulated amortisation and 
any accumulated impairment losses.  

Intangible  assets  acquired  as part  of  a business combination,  with an  indefinite  useful  live  are  measured at  fair  value.  Intangible 
assets with indefinite useful lives are not amortised but instead are subject to impairment testing at least annually.  

The useful lives of intangibles are as follows:  

Customer contracts and lists 
Business intellectual property rights 
Website development costs 
Software 

to expiration of the agreement 
4 years - indefinite 
indefinite 
5 years 

L. Impairment of non-financial assets 
At  each  reporting  date,  the  Group  reviews  the  carrying  amounts  of  its  non-financial  assets  (other  than  deferred  tax  assets)  to 
determine whether there is any indication of impairment. If any such indication exists, the asset’s recoverable amount is estimated. 
Goodwill is tested annually for impairment. 

For impairment testing, assets are grouped together into the smallest group of assets that generates cash inflows from continuing 
use  that  is  largely  independent  of  the  cash  inflows  of  other  assets  or  Cash  Generating  Units  (“CGUs”).  Goodwill  arising  from  a 
business combination is allocated to CGUs or groups of CGUs that are expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination. 

The recoverable amount of an asset or CGU is the greater of its value in use and its fair value less cost to sell. Value in use is based 
on  the  estimated  future  cash  flows,  discounted  to  their  present  value  using  a  pre-tax  discount  rate  that  reflects  current  market 
assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset or CGU. 

An impairment loss is recognised if the carrying amount of an asset or CGU exceeds its recoverable amount. 

The Group’s corporate assets do not generate separate cash inflows and are used by more than one CGU. Corporate assets are 
allocated to CGUs on a reasonable and consistent basis and tested for impairment as part of the testing of the CGUs to which the 
corporate assets are located. 

Impairment losses are recognised in profit or loss. They are allocated first to reduce the carrying amount of any goodwill allocated to 
the CGU, and then to reduce the carrying amounts of the other assets in the CGU on a pro rata basis. 

An impairment loss in respect of goodwill is not reversed. For other assets, an impairment loss is reversed only to the extent that the 
asset’s carrying amount does not exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined, net of depreciation or amortisation, 
if no impairment loss had been recognised. 

Page | 84  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

43.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

M. Deposits, debt securities issued and subordinated liabilities 
Deposits, debt securities issued and subordinated liabilities are the Group’s sources of debt funding. 

The  Group  classifies  capital  instruments  as  financial  liabilities  or  equity  instruments  in  accordance  with  the  substance  of  the 
contractual terms of the instruments.  

Deposits, debt securities issued and subordinated liabilities are initially measured at fair value minus incremental direct transaction 
costs, and subsequently measured at their amortised cost using the effective interest method. 

N. Employee benefits 
i. Long-term employee benefits 
Pension obligations 
The Group has pension obligations arising from both defined benefit and defined contribution pension plans.  

A defined contribution pension plan is one under which the Group pays fixed contributions into a separate fund and has no legal or 
constructive  obligations  to  pay  further  contributions.  Defined  benefit  pension  plans  define  an  amount  of  pension  benefit  that  an 
employee will receive on retirement, usually dependent on one or more factors such as age, years of service and remuneration.  

Under the defined benefit pension plan, in accordance with IAS 19 Employee benefits, the full-service cost for the period, adjusted 
for any changes to the plan, is charged to the income statement. A charge equal to the expected increase in the present value of the 
plan liabilities, as a result of the plan liabilities being one year closer to settlement, and a credit reflecting the long-term expected 
return on assets based on the market value of the scheme assets at the beginning of the period, is included in the income statement. 

The statement of financial position records as an asset or liability as appropriate, the difference between the market value of the plan 
assets and the present value of the accrued plan liabilities. The difference between the expected return on assets and that achieved 
in the period, is recognised in the income statement in the year in which they arise. The defined benefit pension plan obligation is 
calculated by independent actuaries using the projected unit credit method and a discount rate based on the yield on high quality 
rated corporate bonds.   

The Group’s defined contribution pension obligations arise from contributions paid to a Group personal pension plan, an ex gratia 
pension plan, employee personal pension plans and employee co-operative insurance plans. For these pension plans, the amounts 
charged to the income statement represent the contributions payable during the year.  

ii. Share-based compensation 
The Group maintains a share option programme which allows certain Group employees to acquire shares of the Group. The change 
in the fair value of options granted is recognised as an employee expense with a corresponding change in equity. The fair value of 
the options is measured at grant date and spread over the period during which the employees become unconditionally entitled to the 
options.  

At each reporting date, the Group revises its estimate of the number of options that are expected to vest and recognises the impact 
of the revision to original estimates, if any, in the income statement, with a corresponding adjustment to equity.  

The  fair  value  is estimated  using  a  proprietary  binomial  probability  model. The  proceeds received,  net  of  any  directly  attributable 
transaction costs, are credited to share capital (nominal value) and share premium when the options are exercised.  

O. Share capital and reserves 
Share issue costs 
Incremental costs that are directly attributable to the issue of an equity instrument are deducted from the initial measurement of the 
equity instruments. 

P. Earnings per share (“EPS”) 
The Group presents basic and diluted EPS data for its Ordinary Shares. Basic EPS is calculated by dividing the profit or loss that is 
attributable to ordinary Shareholders of MFG by the weighted-average number of Ordinary Shares outstanding during the period. 
Diluted EPS is determined by adjusting profit or loss that is attributable to Ordinary Shareholders and the weighted-average number 
of  Ordinary  Shares  outstanding  for  the  effects  of  all  dilutive  potential  Ordinary  Shares,  which  comprise  share  options  granted  to 
employees. 

Page | 85  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

43.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

Q. Segmental reporting 
A segment is a distinguishable component of the Group that is engaged either in providing products or services (business segment), 
or in providing products or services within a particular economic environment (geographical segment), which is subject to risks and 
rewards that are different from those of other segments. The Group’s primary format for segmental reporting is based on business 
segments.  

An operating segment is a component of the Group that engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues and incur 
expenses, including revenues and expenses relating to  transactions with any of  the Group’s other components, whose operating 
results are regularly reviewed by the CEO who is the chief operating decision maker (“CODM”) to make decisions about resources to 
be allocated to the segment and assess its performance, and for which discrete financial information is available. 

Segment results reported to the CEO include items that are directly attributable to a segment as well as those that can be allocated 
on a reasonable basis. 

Page | 86  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

SHAREHOLDER NOTES 

Page | 87  

 
 
 
Appendix – Glossary of terms  

ALCO 
ARCC 
BBSL 
BL 
BLX 
Bank 
Bank’s Board 
BSL 
CEO 
CET1 
CFL 
CGU 
CODM 
Company 
EAL 
ECF 
ECL 
ESG 
EPS 
FCA 
Fraud risks 
FSA 
FVOCI 
FVTPL 
Group 
HP 
IAS 
ICAAP 
ICG 
IFA 
IFRIC 
IFRS 
Interim financial statements 
IOM 
ISA 
JM 
LSE 
MBL 
MCL 
MFG 
MFX 
MFX.L 
MVL 
NEC 
NOMCO 
NRFL 
OCI 
PIML 
QCA 
REMCO 
RFG 
RMF 
SBA 
Scheme 
SICR 
SPPI 
SR 
Subsidiaries 
TCF 
Three Spires 
UK 
UP  

Assets and Liabilities Committee 
Audit, Risk and Compliance Committee 
Blue Star Business Solutions Limited 
Burnbrae Limited 
The Business Lending Exchange Limited 
Conister Bank Limited 
The Bank’s Board of Directors 
Beer Swaps Limited 
Chief Executive Officer 
Common Equity Tier 1 
Conister Finance & Leasing Ltd 
Cash Generating Unit 
Chief Operating Decision Maker 
Manx Financial Group PLC 
Edgewater Associates Limited 
ECF Asset finance PLC 
Expected Credit Loss 
Environmental, Social and Governance 
Earnings Per Share 
UK Financial Conduct Authority 
Risk of Material Misstatement Due to Fraud 
Isle of Man Financial Services Authority 
Fair Value Through Other Comprehensive Income 
Fair Value Through Profit or Loss 
Comprise the Company and its subsidiaries 
Hire Purchase 
International Accounting Standard 
Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process 
Individual Capital Guidance 
Independent Financial Advisors 
International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee 
International Financial Reporting Standards 
Condensed consolidated interim financial statements 
Isle of Man 
International Standards of Auditing 
Jim Mellon 
London Stock Exchange 
MBL Financial Limited 
Manx Collections Limited 
Manx Financial Group PLC 
Manx FX Limited 
Manx Financial Group PLC ticker symbol on the LSE 
Manx Ventures Limited (previously Bradburn Limited) 
Notice of Error Correction 
Nomination Committee 
Ninkasi Rentals & Finance Limited (previously Beer Swaps Limited) 
Other Comprehensive Income 
Payitmonthly Limited 
Quoted Companies Alliance 
Remuneration Committee 
Rivers Finance Group Plc 
Risk Management Framework 
Share Buyback Agreement 
The Conister Trust Pension and Life Assurance Scheme 
Significant Increase in Credit Risk 
Solely Payments of Principal and Interest 
Southern Rock Insurance Company Limited 
MFG’s subsidiaries being Bank, BBSL, BLX, CFL, ECF, EAL, MFX, MVL, NRFL 
Treating Customers Fairly 
Three Spires Insurance Services Limited 
United Kingdom 
Unrelated parties 

 
 
 
 
 
 
Clarendon House 
Victoria Street 
Douglas 
Isle of Man 
IM1 2LN 

Tel: 
(01624) 694694 
Fax:  (01624) 624278 

www.mfg.im